Bump to autoconf 2.69 and automake 1.15.1

When trying to run the update-gnulib.sh script in gdb, I get this:

Error: Wrong automake version (Unescaped left brace in regex is deprecated, passed through in regex; marked by <-- HERE in m/\${ <-- HERE ([^      =:+{}]+)}/ at /opt/automake/1.11.1/bin/automake line 4113.), we need 1.11.1.
Aborting.

Apparently, it's an issue with a regex in automake that triggers a
warning starting with Perl 5.22.  It has been fixed in automake 1.15.1.
So I think it's a good excuse to bump the versions of autoconf and
automake used in the gnulib import.  And to avoid requiring multiple
builds of autoconf/automake, it was suggested that we bump the required
version of those tools for all binutils-gdb.

For autoconf, the 2.69 version is universally available, so it's an easy
choice.  For automake, different distros and distro versions have
different automake versions.  But 1.15.1 seems to be the most readily
available as a package.  In any case, it's easy to build it from source.

I removed the version checks from AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS and AC_PREREQ,
because I don't think they are useful in our case.  They only specify a
lower bound for the acceptable version of automake/autoconf.  That's
useful if you let the user choose the version of the tool they want to
use, but want to set a minimum version (because you use a feature that
was introduced in that version).  In our case, we force people to use a
specific version anyway.  For the autoconf version, we have the check in
config/override.m4 that enforces the version we want.  It will be one
less thing to update next time we change autotools version.

I hit a few categories of problems that required some changes.  They are
described below along with the chosen solutions.

Problem 1:

  configure.ac:17: warning: AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE: two- and three-arguments forms are deprecated.  For more info, see:
  configure.ac:17: http://www.gnu.org/software/automake/manual/automake.html#Modernize-AM_005fINIT_005fAUTOMAKE-invocation

Solution 1:

  Adjust the code based on the example at that URL.

Problem 2 (in zlib/):

  Makefile.am: error: required file './INSTALL' not found
  Makefile.am:   'automake --add-missing' can install 'INSTALL'
  Makefile.am: error: required file './NEWS' not found
  Makefile.am: error: required file './AUTHORS' not found
  Makefile.am: error: required file './COPYING' not found
  Makefile.am:   'automake --add-missing' can install 'COPYING'

Solution 2:

  Add the foreign option to AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS.

Problem 3:

  doc/Makefile.am:20: error: support for Cygnus-style trees has been removed

Solution 3:

  Remove the cygnus options.

Problem 4:

  Makefile.am:656: warning: 'INCLUDES' is the old name for 'AM_CPPFLAGS' (or '*_CPPFLAGS')

Solution 4:

  Rename "INCLUDES = " to "AM_CPPFLAGS += " (because AM_CPPFLAGS is
  already defined earlier).

Problem 5:

  doc/Makefile.am:71: warning: suffix '.texinfo' for Texinfo files is discouraged; use '.texi' instead
  doc/Makefile.am: warning: Oops!
  doc/Makefile.am:     It appears this file (or files included by it) are triggering
  doc/Makefile.am:     an undocumented, soon-to-be-removed automake hack.
  doc/Makefile.am:     Future automake versions will no longer place in the builddir
  doc/Makefile.am:     (rather than in the srcdir) the generated '.info' files that
  doc/Makefile.am:     appear to be cleaned, by e.g. being listed in CLEANFILES or
  doc/Makefile.am:     DISTCLEANFILES.
  doc/Makefile.am:     If you want your '.info' files to be placed in the builddir
  doc/Makefile.am:     rather than in the srcdir, you have to use the shiny new
  doc/Makefile.am:     'info-in-builddir' automake option.

Solution 5:

  Rename .texinfo files to .texi.

Problem 6:

  doc/Makefile.am: warning: Oops!
  doc/Makefile.am:     It appears this file (or files included by it) are triggering
  doc/Makefile.am:     an undocumented, soon-to-be-removed automake hack.
  doc/Makefile.am:     Future automake versions will no longer place in the builddir
  doc/Makefile.am:     (rather than in the srcdir) the generated '.info' files that
  doc/Makefile.am:     appear to be cleaned, by e.g. being listed in CLEANFILES or
  doc/Makefile.am:     DISTCLEANFILES.
  doc/Makefile.am:     If you want your '.info' files to be placed in the builddir
  doc/Makefile.am:     rather than in the srcdir, you have to use the shiny new
  doc/Makefile.am:     'info-in-builddir' automake option.

Solution 6:

  Remove the hack at the bottom of doc/Makefile.am and use
  the info-in-builddir automake option.

Problem 7:

  doc/Makefile.am:35: error: required file '../texinfo.tex' not found
  doc/Makefile.am:35:   'automake --add-missing' can install 'texinfo.tex'

Solution 7:

  Use the no-texinfo.tex automake option.  We also have one in
  texinfo/texinfo.tex, not sure if we should point to that, or move it
  (or a newer version of it added with automake --add-missing) to
  top-level.

Problem 8:

  Makefile.am:131: warning: source file 'config/tc-aarch64.c' is in a subdirectory,
  Makefile.am:131: but option 'subdir-objects' is disabled
  automake: warning: possible forward-incompatibility.
  automake: At least a source file is in a subdirectory, but the 'subdir-objects'
  automake: automake option hasn't been enabled.  For now, the corresponding output
  automake: object file(s) will be placed in the top-level directory.  However,
  automake: this behaviour will change in future Automake versions: they will
  automake: unconditionally cause object files to be placed in the same subdirectory
  automake: of the corresponding sources.
  automake: You are advised to start using 'subdir-objects' option throughout your
  automake: project, to avoid future incompatibilities.

Solution 8:

  Use subdir-objects, that means adjusting references to some .o that will now
  be in config/.

Problem 9:

  configure.ac:375: warning: AC_LANG_CONFTEST: no AC_LANG_SOURCE call detected in body
  ../../lib/autoconf/lang.m4:193: AC_LANG_CONFTEST is expanded from...
  ../../lib/autoconf/general.m4:2601: _AC_COMPILE_IFELSE is expanded from...
  ../../lib/autoconf/general.m4:2617: AC_COMPILE_IFELSE is expanded from...
  ../../lib/m4sugar/m4sh.m4:639: AS_IF is expanded from...
  ../../lib/autoconf/general.m4:2042: AC_CACHE_VAL is expanded from...
  ../../lib/autoconf/general.m4:2063: AC_CACHE_CHECK is expanded from...
  configure.ac:375: the top level

Solution 9:

  Use AC_LANG_SOURCE, or use proper quoting.

Problem 10 (in intl/):

  configure.ac:7: warning: AC_COMPILE_IFELSE was called before AC_USE_SYSTEM_EXTENSIONS
  /usr/share/aclocal/threadlib.m4:36: gl_THREADLIB_EARLY_BODY is expanded from...
  /usr/share/aclocal/threadlib.m4:29: gl_THREADLIB_EARLY is expanded from...
  /usr/share/aclocal/threadlib.m4:318: gl_THREADLIB is expanded from...
  /usr/share/aclocal/lock.m4:9: gl_LOCK is expanded from...
  /usr/share/aclocal/intl.m4:211: gt_INTL_SUBDIR_CORE is expanded from...
  /usr/share/aclocal/intl.m4:25: AM_INTL_SUBDIR is expanded from...
  /usr/share/aclocal/gettext.m4:57: AM_GNU_GETTEXT is expanded from...
  configure.ac:7: the top level

Solution 10:

  Add AC_USE_SYSTEM_EXTENSIONS in configure.ac.

ChangeLog:

	* libtool.m4: Use AC_LANG_SOURCE.
	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ, use AC_LANG_SOURCE.
	* README-maintainer-mode: Update version requirements.
	* ar-lib: New file.
	* test-driver: New file.
	* configure: Re-generate.

bfd/ChangeLog:

	* Makefile.am (AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove 1.11.
	(INCLUDES): Rename to ...
	(AM_CPPFLAGS): ... this.
	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* doc/Makefile.am (AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove 1.9, cygnus, add
	info-in-builddir no-texinfo.tex.
	(info_TEXINFOS): Rename bfd.texinfo to bfd.texi.
	* doc/bfd.texinfo: Rename to ...
	* doc/bfd.texi: ... this.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* config.in: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* doc/Makefile.in: Re-generate.

binutils/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* doc/Makefile.am (AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove cygnus, add
	info-in-builddir no-texinfo.tex.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* config.in: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* doc/Makefile.in: Re-generate.

config/ChangeLog:

	* override.m4 (_GCC_AUTOCONF_VERSION): Bump from 2.64 to 2.69.

etc/ChangeLog:

	* configure.in: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* configure: Re-generate.

gas/ChangeLog:

	* Makefile.am (AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove 1.11, add subdir-objects.
	(TARG_CPU_O, OBJ_FORMAT_O, ATOF_TARG_O): Add config/ prefix.
	* configure.ac (TARG_CPU_O, OBJ_FORMAT_O, ATOF_TARG_O, emfiles,
	extra_objects): Add config/ prefix.
	* doc/as.texinfo: Rename to...
	* doc/as.texi: ... this.
	* doc/Makefile.am: Rename as.texinfo to as.texi throughout.
	Remove DISTCLEANFILES hack.
	(AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove 1.8, cygnus, add no-texinfo.tex and
	info-in-builddir.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* config.in: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* doc/Makefile.in: Re-generate.

gdb/ChangeLog:

	* common/common-defs.h (PACKAGE_NAME, PACKAGE_VERSION,
	PACKAGE_STRING, PACKAGE_TARNAME): Undefine.
	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ, add missing quoting.
	* gnulib/configure.ac: Modernize usage of
	AC_INIT/AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE.  Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* gnulib/update-gnulib.sh (AUTOCONF_VERSION): Bump to 2.69.
	(AUTOMAKE_VERSION): Bump to 1.15.1.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* config.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* gnulib/aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* gnulib/config.in: Re-generate.
	* gnulib/configure: Re-generate.
	* gnulib/import/Makefile.in: Re-generate.

gdb/gdbserver/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ, add missing quoting.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* config.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.

gdb/testsuite/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* configure: Re-generate.

gold/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ, add missing quoting and usage
	of AC_LANG_SOURCE.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* testsuite/Makefile.in: Re-generate.

gprof/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* Makefile.am: Remove DISTCLEANFILES hack.
	(AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove 1.11, add info-in-builddir.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* gconfig.in: Re-generate.

intl/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Add AC_USE_SYSTEM_EXTENSIONS, remove AC_PREREQ.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* config.h.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.

ld/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* Makefile.am: Remove DISTCLEANFILES hack, rename ld.texinfo to
	ld.texi, ldint.texinfo to ldint.texi throughout.
	(AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Add info-in-builddir.
	* README: Rename ld.texinfo to ld.texi, ldint.texinfo to
	ldint.texi throughout.
	* gen-doc.texi: Likewise.
	* h8-doc.texi: Likewise.
	* ld.texinfo: Rename to ...
	* ld.texi: ... this.
	* ldint.texinfo: Rename to ...
	* ldint.texi: ... this.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* config.in: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.

libdecnumber/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4.

libiberty/ChangeLog:

	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* configure: Re-generate.
	* config.in: Re-generate.

opcodes/ChangeLog:

	* Makefile.am (AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove 1.11.
	* configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.

readline/ChangeLog.gdb:

	* configure: Re-generate.
	* examples/rlfe/configure: Re-generate.

sim/ChangeLog:

	* All configure.ac: Remove AC_PREREQ.
	* All configure: Re-generate.

zlib/ChangeLog.bin-gdb:

	* configure.ac: Modernize AC_INIT call, remove AC_PREREQ.
	* Makefile.am (AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS): Remove 1.8, cygnus, add
	foreign.
	* Makefile.in: Re-generate.
	* aclocal.m4: Re-generate.
	* configure: Re-generate.

1 files changed, 8249 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/gas/doc/as.texi b/gas/doc/as.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..493049c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/gas/doc/as.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,8249 @@
+\input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
+@c  Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+@c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
+@c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
+@c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
+@c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
+@c         in config/tc-*.c
+@c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
+@c         in config/obj-*.c
+@c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
+@c %**start of header
+@setfilename as.info
+@c ---config---
+@macro gcctabopt{body}
+@code{\body\}
+@end macro
+@c defaults, config file may override:
+@set have-stabs
+@c ---
+@c man begin NAME
+@c ---
+@include asconfig.texi
+@include bfdver.texi
+@c ---
+@c man end
+@c ---
+@c common OR combinations of conditions
+@ifset COFF
+@set COFF-ELF
+@end ifset
+@ifset ELF
+@set COFF-ELF
+@end ifset
+@ifset AOUT
+@set aout
+@end ifset
+@ifset ARM/Thumb
+@set ARM
+@end ifset
+@ifset Blackfin
+@set Blackfin
+@end ifset
+@ifset H8/300
+@set H8
+@end ifset
+@ifset SH
+@set H8
+@end ifset
+@ifset HPPA
+@set abnormal-separator
+@end ifset
+@c ------------
+@ifset GENERIC
+@settitle Using @value{AS}
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
+@end ifclear
+@setchapternewpage odd
+@c %**end of header
+
+@c @smallbook
+@c @set SMALL
+@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
+@c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
+@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
+@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
+@c
+@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
+@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
+@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
+@c break.
+@c
+@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
+@c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
+@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
+@c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
+@c discretion, of course.
+@ifinfo
+@set SMALL
+@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
+@c might as well show 'em anyways.
+@end ifinfo
+
+@ifnottex
+@dircategory Software development
+@direntry
+* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
+* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
+@end direntry
+@end ifnottex
+
+@finalout
+@syncodeindex ky cp
+
+@copying
+This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
+
+@c man begin COPYRIGHT
+Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
+or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
+Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
+section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
+
+@c man end
+@end copying
+
+@titlepage
+@title Using @value{AS}
+@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
+@end ifclear
+@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
+@sp 1
+@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
+@end ifset
+@sp 1
+@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
+@sp 1
+@sp 13
+The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
+Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
+first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
+The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
+distracting the boss while they got some work
+done.
+@sp 3
+@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
+@page
+@tex
+{\parskip=0pt
+\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
+\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
+}
+%"boxit" macro for figures:
+%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
+\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
+     \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
+#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
+\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
+@end tex
+
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
+      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+      with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
+      Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
+      section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
+
+@end titlepage
+@contents
+
+@ifnottex
+@node Top
+@top Using @value{AS}
+
+This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
+@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
+@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
+@end ifset
+version @value{VERSION}.
+@ifclear GENERIC
+This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
+code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
+@end ifclear
+
+This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
+Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
+section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
+
+@menu
+* Overview::                    Overview
+* Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
+* Syntax::                      Syntax
+* Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
+* Symbols::                     Symbols
+* Expressions::                 Expressions
+* Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
+@ifset ELF
+* Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
+@end ifset
+* Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
+* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
+* Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
+* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
+* AS Index::                    AS Index
+@end menu
+@end ifnottex
+
+@node Overview
+@chapter Overview
+@iftex
+This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
+@ifclear GENERIC
+This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
+code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
+@end ifclear
+@end iftex
+
+@cindex invocation summary
+@cindex option summary
+@cindex summary of options
+Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
+see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
+
+@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
+
+@ignore
+@c man begin SEEALSO
+gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
+@c man end
+@end ignore
+
+@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
+@c to be limited to one line for the header.
+@smallexample
+@c man begin SYNOPSIS
+@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
+ [@b{--compress-debug-sections}]  [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
+ [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
+ [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
+ [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
+ [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
+ [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
+ [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
+ [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
+ [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
+ [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
+ [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
+ [@b{--statistics}]
+ [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
+ [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
+ [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
+ [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
+ [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
+ [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
+ [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
+ [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
+@c
+@c man end
+@c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
+@c Add an empty line for separation.
+@c man begin TARGET
+@ifset AARCH64
+
+@emph{Target AArch64 options:}
+   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
+   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset ALPHA
+
+@emph{Target Alpha options:}
+   [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
+   [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
+   [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
+   [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
+   [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset ARC
+
+@emph{Target ARC options:}
+   [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
+   [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
+   [@b{-mcode-density}]
+   [@b{-mrelax}]
+   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset ARM
+
+@emph{Target ARM options:}
+@c Don't document the deprecated options
+   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
+   [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
+   [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
+   [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
+   [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
+   [@b{-mthumb}]
+   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
+   [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
+    @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
+   [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset Blackfin
+
+@emph{Target Blackfin options:}
+   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
+   [@b{-mfdpic}]
+   [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
+   [@b{-mnopic}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset CRIS
+
+@emph{Target CRIS options:}
+   [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
+   [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
+   [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
+   [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
+@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
+@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset D10V
+
+@emph{Target D10V options:}
+   [@b{-O}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset D30V
+
+@emph{Target D30V options:}
+   [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset EPIPHANY
+
+@emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
+   [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset H8
+
+@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
+   [-h-tick-hex]
+@end ifset
+@ifset HPPA
+@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
+@end ifset
+@ifset I80386
+
+@emph{Target i386 options:}
+   [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
+   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset IA64
+
+@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
+   [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
+   [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
+   [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
+   [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
+   [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
+   [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
+   [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset IP2K
+
+@emph{Target IP2K options:}
+   [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset M32C
+
+@emph{Target M32C options:}
+   [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
+@end ifset
+@ifset M32R
+
+@emph{Target M32R options:}
+   [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
+   @b{--W[n]p}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset M680X0
+
+@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
+   [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset M68HC11
+
+@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
+   [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
+   [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
+   [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
+   [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
+   [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
+   [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset MCORE
+
+@emph{Target MCORE options:}
+   [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
+   [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset METAG
+
+@emph{Target Meta options:}
+   [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset MICROBLAZE
+@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
+@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
+@end ifset
+@ifset MIPS
+
+@emph{Target MIPS options:}
+   [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
+   [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
+   [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
+   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
+   [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
+   [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
+   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
+   [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
+   [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
+   [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
+   [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
+   [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
+   [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
+   [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
+   [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
+   [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
+   [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
+   [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
+   [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
+   [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
+   [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
+   [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
+   [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
+   [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
+   [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
+   [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
+   [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
+   [@b{-mcrc}] [@b{-mno-crc}]
+   [@b{-mginv}] [@b{-mno-ginv}]
+   [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
+   [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
+   [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
+   [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
+   [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
+   [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
+   [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset MMIX
+
+@emph{Target MMIX options:}
+   [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
+   [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
+   [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
+   [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset NIOSII
+
+@emph{Target Nios II options:}
+   [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
+   [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset NDS32
+
+@emph{Target NDS32 options:}
+    [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
+    [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
+    [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}]  [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
+    [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
+    [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
+    [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
+    [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
+    [@b{-mb2bb}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset PDP11
+
+@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
+   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
+   [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
+   [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset PJ
+
+@emph{Target picoJava options:}
+   [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset PPC
+
+@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
+   [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
+   [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
+    @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
+    @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
+    @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
+    @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
+    @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
+   [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
+   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
+   [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
+   [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
+   [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
+   [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset PRU
+
+@emph{Target PRU options:}
+   [@b{-link-relax}]
+   [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
+   [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset RISCV
+
+@emph{Target RISC-V options:}
+   [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
+   [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
+   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset RL78
+
+@emph{Target RL78 options:}
+   [@b{-mg10}]
+   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset RX
+
+@emph{Target RX options:}
+   [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
+   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
+   [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
+   [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
+   [@b{-mpid}]
+   [@b{-mrelax}]
+   [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
+   [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset S390
+
+@emph{Target s390 options:}
+   [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
+   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
+   [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset SCORE
+
+@emph{Target SCORE options:}
+   [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
+   [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
+   [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
+   [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset SPARC
+
+@emph{Target SPARC options:}
+@c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
+   [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
+    @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
+    @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
+    @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
+    @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
+    @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
+   [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
+    @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
+    @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
+    @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
+    @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
+    @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
+    @b{-bump}]
+   [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
+   [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset TIC54X
+
+@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
+ [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
+ [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset TIC6X
+
+@emph{Target TIC6X options:}
+   [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
+   [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
+   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset TILEGX
+
+@emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
+   [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset TILEPRO
+@c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
+@end ifset
+@ifset VISIUM
+
+@emph{Target Visium options:}
+   [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset XTENSA
+
+@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
+ [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
+ [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
+ [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
+ [@b{--[no-]transform}]
+ [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
+ [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset Z80
+
+@emph{Target Z80 options:}
+  [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
+  [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
+  [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
+  [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
+  [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
+  [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
+  [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
+@end ifset
+@ifset Z8000
+
+@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
+@end ifset
+
+@c man end
+@end smallexample
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@include at-file.texi
+
+@item -a[cdghlmns]
+Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -ac
+omit false conditionals
+
+@item -ad
+omit debugging directives
+
+@item -ag
+include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
+
+@item -ah
+include high-level source
+
+@item -al
+include assembly
+
+@item -am
+include macro expansions
+
+@item -an
+omit forms processing
+
+@item -as
+include symbols
+
+@item =file
+set the name of the listing file
+@end table
+
+You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
+listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
+the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
+
+@item --alternate
+Begin in alternate macro mode.
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
+@end ifclear
+
+@item --compress-debug-sections
+Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
+ELF ABI.  The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
+linkers and object file utilities.  Note if compression would make a
+given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
+@item --compress-debug-sections=none
+@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
+@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
+@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
+These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
+@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
+@option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
+@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
+@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
+@option{--compress-debug-sections}.
+@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
+sections using zlib.  The debug sections are renamed to begin with
+@samp{.zdebug}.  Note if compression would make a given section
+@emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
+
+@end ifset
+
+@item --nocompress-debug-sections
+Do not compress DWARF debug sections.  This is usually the default for all
+targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
+override this.
+
+@item -D
+Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
+other assemblers.
+
+@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
+When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
+information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
+
+@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
+Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
+@var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
+indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
+value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
+use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
+
+@item -f
+``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
+compiler output).
+
+@item -g
+@itemx --gen-debug
+Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
+debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
+ECOFF or DWARF2.
+
+@item --gstabs
+Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
+may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
+
+@item --gstabs+
+Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
+extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
+debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
+may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
+the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
+
+@item --gdwarf-2
+Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
+may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
+option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
+
+@item --gdwarf-sections
+Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
+.debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
+corresponding code section.  For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
+will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
+@var{.debug_line.text.func}.  If the code section is just called @var{.text}
+then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
+suffix.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@item --size-check=error
+@itemx --size-check=warning
+Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
+
+@item --elf-stt-common=no
+@itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
+These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
+symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type.  The default can be controlled
+by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
+
+@item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
+@itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
+These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
+attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
+The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
+configure option.
+
+@end ifset
+
+@item --help
+Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
+
+@item --target-help
+Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
+
+@item -I @var{dir}
+Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
+
+@item -J
+Don't warn about signed overflow.
+
+@item -K
+@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
+@end ifset
+
+@item -L
+@itemx --keep-locals
+Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
+system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
+or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Symbol Names}.
+@end ifclear
+
+@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
+Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
+listing to @var{number}.
+
+@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
+Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
+lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
+
+@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
+Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
+@var{number} bytes.
+
+@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
+Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
+to @var{number} + 1.
+
+@item --no-pad-sections
+Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
+of that section.  The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
+which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
+
+@item -o @var{objfile}
+Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
+
+@item -R
+Fold the data section into the text section.
+
+@item --hash-size=@var{number}
+Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
+@var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
+assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
+memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
+requirements at the expense of speed.
+
+@item --reduce-memory-overheads
+This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
+assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
+@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@item --sectname-subst
+Honor substitution sequences in section names.
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@item --statistics
+Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
+assembly.
+
+@item --strip-local-absolute
+Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
+
+@item -v
+@itemx -version
+Print the @command{as} version.
+
+@item --version
+Print the @command{as} version and exit.
+
+@item -W
+@itemx --no-warn
+Suppress warning messages.
+
+@item --fatal-warnings
+Treat warnings as errors.
+
+@item --warn
+Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
+
+@item -w
+Ignored.
+
+@item -x
+Ignored.
+
+@item -Z
+Generate an object file even after errors.
+
+@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
+Standard input, or source files to assemble.
+
+@end table
+@c man end
+
+@ifset AARCH64
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
+64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-aarch64.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ALPHA
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for an Alpha processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
+processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-alpha.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+@ifset ARC
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
+processor.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
+This option selects the core processor variant.
+@item -EB | -EL
+Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
+@item -mcode-density
+Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ARM
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
+processor family.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
+Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
+@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
+Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
+@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
+Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
+@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
+Select which floating point ABI is in use.
+@item -mthumb
+Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
+@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
+Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
+@item -EB | -EL
+Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
+@item -mthumb-interwork
+Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
+ARM code in mind.
+@item -mccs
+Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
+@item -k
+Specify that PIC code has been generated.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+@c man end
+
+@ifset Blackfin
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
+configured for the Blackfin processor family.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+the Blackfin processor family.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-bfin.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+@ifset CRIS
+See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset D10V
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+a D10V processor.
+@table @gcctabopt
+@cindex D10V optimization
+@cindex optimization, D10V
+@item -O
+Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset D30V
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
+processor.
+@table @gcctabopt
+@cindex D30V optimization
+@cindex optimization, D30V
+@item -O
+Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
+
+@cindex D30V nops
+@item -n
+Warn when nops are generated.
+
+@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
+@item -N
+Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+@c man end
+
+@ifset EPIPHANY
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
+Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
+configured for an Epiphany processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+an Epiphany processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-epiphany.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset H8300
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for an H8/300 processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
+processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-h8300.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset I80386
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
+configured for an i386 processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+an i386 processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-i386.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+@ifset IP2K
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
+Ubicom IP2K series.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@item -mip2022ext
+Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
+
+@item -mip2022
+Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
+just the basic IP2022 ones.
+
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M32C
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
+Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@item -m32c
+Assemble M32C instructions.
+
+@item -m16c
+Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
+
+@item -relax
+Enable support for link-time relaxations.
+
+@item -h-tick-hex
+Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
+
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M32R
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
+Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@item --m32rx
+Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
+is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
+
+@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
+Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
+encountered.
+
+@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
+Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
+encountered.
+
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M680X0
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
+Motorola 68000 series.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@item -l
+Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
+
+@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
+@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
+@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
+Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
+is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
+
+@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
+The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
+The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
+the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
+two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
+coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
+
+@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
+The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
+unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
+
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset NIOSII
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for an Altera Nios II processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
+Altera Nios II processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-nios2.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset PDP11
+
+For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
+see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -mpic | -mno-pic
+Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
+default is @option{-mpic}.
+
+@item -mall
+@itemx -mall-extensions
+Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
+
+@item -mno-extensions
+Disable all instruction set extensions.
+
+@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
+Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
+
+@item -m@var{cpu}
+Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
+disable all other extensions.
+
+@item -m@var{machine}
+Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
+model, and disable all other extensions.
+@end table
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset PJ
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+a picoJava processor.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@cindex PJ endianness
+@cindex endianness, PJ
+@cindex big endian output, PJ
+@item -mb
+Generate ``big endian'' format output.
+
+@cindex little endian output, PJ
+@item -ml
+Generate ``little endian'' format output.
+
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset PRU
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a PRU processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
+PRU processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-pru.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M68HC11
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
+Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+
+@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
+Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
+defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
+
+@item --xgate-ramoffset
+Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
+XGATE address space.
+
+@item -mshort
+Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
+
+@item -mlong
+Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
+
+@item -mshort-double
+Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
+
+@item -mlong-double
+Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
+
+@item --force-long-branches
+Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
+conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
+sub routine.
+
+@item -S | --short-branches
+Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
+when the offset is out of range.
+
+@item --strict-direct-mode
+Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
+when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
+
+@item --print-insn-syntax
+Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
+
+@item --print-opcodes
+Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
+
+@item --generate-example
+Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
+This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset SPARC
+The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
+for the SPARC architecture:
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
+@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
+Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
+
+@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
+@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
+
+@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
+UltraSPARC extensions.
+
+@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
+For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
+equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
+
+@item -bump
+Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset TIC54X
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
+architecture.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -mfar-mode
+Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
+extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
+@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
+Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
+@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
+Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
+behaviour in the shell.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MIPS
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+a MIPS processor.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -G @var{num}
+This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
+implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
+use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
+
+@cindex MIPS endianness
+@cindex endianness, MIPS
+@cindex big endian output, MIPS
+@item -EB
+Generate ``big endian'' format output.
+
+@cindex little endian output, MIPS
+@item -EL
+Generate ``little endian'' format output.
+
+@cindex MIPS ISA
+@item -mips1
+@itemx -mips2
+@itemx -mips3
+@itemx -mips4
+@itemx -mips5
+@itemx -mips32
+@itemx -mips32r2
+@itemx -mips32r3
+@itemx -mips32r5
+@itemx -mips32r6
+@itemx -mips64
+@itemx -mips64r2
+@itemx -mips64r3
+@itemx -mips64r5
+@itemx -mips64r6
+Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
+@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
+alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
+@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
+@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
+@samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
+@samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
+MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
+Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
+MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
+
+@item -march=@var{cpu}
+Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
+
+@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
+Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
+
+@item -mfix7000
+@itemx -mno-fix7000
+Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
+of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
+
+@item -mfix-rm7000
+@itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
+Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
+followed by a load instruction.
+
+@item -mdebug
+@itemx -no-mdebug
+Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
+section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
+
+@item -mpdr
+@itemx -mno-pdr
+Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
+
+@item -mgp32
+@itemx -mfp32
+The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
+flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
+all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
+and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
+
+@item -mgp64
+@itemx -mfp64
+The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
+flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
+all times.  @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
+and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
+
+@item -mfpxx
+The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
+this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
+which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
+32 or 64 bits wide.
+
+@item -modd-spreg
+@itemx -mno-odd-spreg
+Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
+registers when supported by the ISA.  @samp{-mfpxx} implies
+@samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
+
+@item -mips16
+@itemx -no-mips16
+Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
+@code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
+turns off this option.
+
+@item -mmips16e2
+@itemx -mno-mips16e2
+Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode.  This is equivalent
+to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
+@samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mmicromips
+@itemx -mno-micromips
+Generate code for the microMIPS processor.  This is equivalent to putting
+@code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
+@samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option.  This is equivalent to putting
+@code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
+
+@item -msmartmips
+@itemx -mno-smartmips
+Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set.  This is
+equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
+file.  @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mips3d
+@itemx -no-mips3d
+Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
+This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
+@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mdmx
+@itemx -no-mdmx
+Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
+This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
+@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mdsp
+@itemx -mno-dsp
+Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
+This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
+@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mdspr2
+@itemx -mno-dspr2
+Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
+This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
+This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
+@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mdspr3
+@itemx -mno-dspr3
+Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
+This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
+This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
+@samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mmsa
+@itemx -mno-msa
+Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
+This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
+@samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mxpa
+@itemx -mno-xpa
+Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
+This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
+@samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mmt
+@itemx -mno-mt
+Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
+This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
+@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mmcu
+@itemx -mno-mcu
+Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
+This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
+@samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mcrc
+@itemx -mno-crc
+Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application
+Specific Extension.  This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions.
+@samp{-mno-crc} turns off this option.
+
+@item -mginv
+@itemx -mno-ginv
+Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific
+Extension.  This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions.
+@samp{-mno-ginv} turns off this option.
+
+@item -minsn32
+@itemx -mno-insn32
+Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
+microMIPS processor.  This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
+instructions.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
+the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
+option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
+start of the assembly file.  By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
+selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
+
+@item --construct-floats
+@itemx --no-construct-floats
+The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
+double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
+value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
+the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
+selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
+
+@item --relax-branch
+@itemx --no-relax-branch
+The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
+branches.  By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
+out-of-range branches to produce an error.
+
+@item -mignore-branch-isa
+@itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
+Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes.  The
+semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
+most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
+same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label.  Therefore GAS has
+checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
+modes match.  @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks.  By
+default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
+branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
+
+@item -mnan=@var{encoding}
+Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
+(@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format.  The latter is the default.
+
+@cindex emulation
+@item --emulation=@var{name}
+This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
+on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both.  MIPS ECOFF support was
+removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
+It is retained for backwards compatibility.
+
+The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
+@samp{mipsbelf}.  Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
+is always ELF.  @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
+big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
+preferred options instead.
+
+@item -nocpp
+@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
+the native tools.
+
+@item --trap
+@itemx --no-trap
+@itemx --break
+@itemx --no-break
+Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
+@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
+(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
+@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
+break exception.
+
+@item -n
+When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
+time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
+@end table
+@c man end
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MCORE
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+an MCore processor.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -jsri2bsr
+@itemx -nojsri2bsr
+Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
+The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
+
+@item -sifilter
+@itemx -nosifilter
+Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
+The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
+
+@item -relax
+Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
+
+@item -mcpu=[210|340]
+Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
+can be assembled.
+
+@item -EB
+Assemble for a big endian target.
+
+@item -EL
+Assemble for a little endian target.
+
+@end table
+@end ifset
+@c man end
+
+@ifset METAG
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a Meta processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
+Meta processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-metag.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+@ifset MMIX
+See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset NDS32
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a NDS32 processor.
+@end ifclear
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
+NDS32 processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-nds32.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@c man end
+@ifset PPC
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a PowerPC processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
+PowerPC processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-ppc.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset RISCV
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a RISC-V processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
+RISC-V processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-riscv.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+@ifset RX
+See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset S390
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
+processor family.
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -m31
+@itemx -m64
+Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
+@item -mesa
+@item -mzarch
+Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
+Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
+@item -march=@var{processor}
+Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
+@samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
+@samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
+@samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
+@samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), or @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}).
+@item -mregnames
+@itemx -mno-regnames
+Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
+@item -mwarn-areg-zero
+Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
+but evaluates to zero.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+@c man end
+
+@ifset TIC6X
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a TMS320C6000 processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
+TMS320C6000 processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-tic6x.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset TILEGX
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a TILE-Gx processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
+processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-tilegx.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset VISIUM
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for a Visium processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
+processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-visium.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset XTENSA
+
+@ifclear man
+@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
+for an Xtensa processor.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset man
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
+Xtensa processor.
+@c man end
+@c man begin INCLUDE
+@include c-xtensa.texi
+@c ended inside the included file
+@end ifset
+
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin OPTIONS
+
+@ifset Z80
+The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
+a Z80 family processor.
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item -z80
+Assemble for Z80 processor.
+@item -r800
+Assemble for R800 processor.
+@item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
+@itemx -Wnud
+Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
+@item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
+@itemx -Wnup
+Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
+@item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
+@itemx -Wud
+Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
+@item  -warn-unportable-instructions
+@itemx -Wup
+Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
+@item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
+@itemx -Fud
+Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
+@item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
+@itemx -Fup
+Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+
+@c man end
+
+@menu
+* Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
+* GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
+* Object Formats::              Object File Formats
+* Command Line::                Command Line
+* Input Files::                 Input Files
+* Object::                      Output (Object) File
+* Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
+@end menu
+
+@node Manual
+@section Structure of this Manual
+
+@cindex manual, structure and purpose
+This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
+@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
+notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
+@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
+configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset GENERIC
+This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
+various flavors of the assembler.
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
+On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
+to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
+In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
+architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
+mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
+particular architecture.
+@ifset GENERIC
+You may want to consult the manufacturer's
+machine architecture manual for this information.
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset H8/300
+For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
+Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
+Programming Manual} (Renesas).
+@end ifset
+@ifset SH
+For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
+see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
+@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
+@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
+@end ifset
+@ifset Z8000
+For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
+@ignore
+Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
+the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
+Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
+computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
+once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
+qualification.
+
+@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
+human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
+computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
+@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
+@end ignore
+
+@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
+@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
+@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
+@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
+@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
+@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
+@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
+@c directives).
+
+@node GNU Assembler
+@section The GNU Assembler
+
+@c man begin DESCRIPTION
+
+@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
+@ifclear GENERIC
+This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
+configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
+@end ifclear
+If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
+should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
+architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
+including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
+@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
+
+@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
+@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
+@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
+@code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
+assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
+machine would assemble.
+@ifset VAX
+Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
+@end ifset
+@ifset M680X0
+@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
+@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
+This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
+assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
+incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
+@end ifset
+
+@c man end
+
+Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
+program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
+@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
+
+@node Object Formats
+@section Object File Formats
+
+@cindex object file format
+The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
+object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
+write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
+are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
+Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
+For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
+@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
+@end ifclear
+@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
+@ifset HPPA
+On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
+SOM or ELF format object files.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Command Line
+@section Command Line
+
+@cindex command line conventions
+
+After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
+options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
+before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
+significant.
+
+@cindex standard input, as input file
+@kindex --
+@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
+explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
+
+@cindex options, command line
+Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
+hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
+@command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
+option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
+the letter is important.   All options are optional.
+
+Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
+name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
+with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
+standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
+
+@smallexample
+@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
+@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Input Files
+@section Input Files
+
+@cindex input
+@cindex source program
+@cindex files, input
+We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
+describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
+be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
+doesn't change the meaning of the source.
+
+@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
+@c APL training...   doc@cygnus.com
+The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
+order specified.
+
+@c man begin DESCRIPTION
+Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
+program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
+(The standard input is also a file.)
+
+You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
+names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
+command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
+is taken to be an input file name.
+
+If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
+from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
+may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
+to assemble.
+
+Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
+in your command line.
+
+If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
+file.
+
+@c man end
+
+@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
+
+@cindex input file linenumbers
+@cindex line numbers, in input files
+There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
+either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
+number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
+``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
+
+@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
+to @command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
+directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
+error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
+is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
+@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
+@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
+
+@node Object
+@section Output (Object) File
+
+@cindex object file
+@cindex output file
+@kindex a.out
+@kindex .o
+Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
+your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
+is the object file.  Its default name is @code{a.out}.
+You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
+object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
+reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
+directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
+possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
+
+@cindex linker
+@kindex ld
+The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
+assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
+the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
+information for the debugger.
+
+@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
+@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
+
+@node Errors
+@section Error and Warning Messages
+
+@c man begin DESCRIPTION
+
+@cindex error messages
+@cindex warning messages
+@cindex messages from assembler
+@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
+file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
+runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
+that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
+grave problem that stops the assembly.
+
+@c man end
+
+@cindex format of warning messages
+Warning messages have the format
+
+@smallexample
+file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+@cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
+(where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If both a logical file name
+(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
+@ifset GENERIC
+(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
+@end ifset
+have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
+in the current assembler source file will be used.  The message text is
+intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
+
+Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
+directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive.  For example:
+
+@smallexample
+  .file 2 "bar.c"
+     error_assembler_source
+  .file "foo.c"
+  .line 30
+      error_c_source
+@end smallexample
+
+produces this output:
+
+@smallexample
+  Assembler messages:
+  asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
+  foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
+@end smallexample
+
+@cindex format of error messages
+Error messages have the format
+
+@smallexample
+file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
+@end smallexample
+
+The file name and line number are derived as for warning
+messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
+because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
+
+@node Invoking
+@chapter Command-Line Options
+
+@cindex options, all versions of assembler
+This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
+versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
+for options specific
+@ifclear GENERIC
+to the @value{TARGET} target.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset GENERIC
+to particular machine architectures.
+@end ifset
+
+@c man begin DESCRIPTION
+
+If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
+you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
+The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
+by commas.  For example:
+
+@smallexample
+gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
+standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
+local symbols in the symbol table).
+
+Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
+command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
+(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
+precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
+assembler.)
+
+@c man end
+
+@menu
+* a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
+* alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
+* D::             -D for compatibility
+* f::             -f to work faster
+* I::             -I for .include search path
+@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+* K::             -K for compatibility
+@end ifclear
+@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+* K::             -K for difference tables
+@end ifset
+
+* L::             -L to retain local symbols
+* listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
+* M::		  -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
+* MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
+* no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
+* o::             -o to name the object file
+* R::             -R to join data and text sections
+* statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
+* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
+* v::             -v to announce version
+* W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
+* Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
+@end menu
+
+@node a
+@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
+
+@kindex -a
+@kindex -ac
+@kindex -ad
+@kindex -ag
+@kindex -ah
+@kindex -al
+@kindex -an
+@kindex -as
+@cindex listings, enabling
+@cindex assembly listings, enabling
+
+These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
+@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
+You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
+@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
+@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
+@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
+High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
+@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
+also.
+
+Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
+information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
+
+Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
+which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
+other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
+omitted from the listing.
+
+Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
+listing.
+
+Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
+listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
+@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
+@code{.sbttl}.
+The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
+If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
+listing-control directives have no effect.
+
+The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
+@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
+
+Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
+because it
+is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
+is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
+directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
+stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
+memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
+
+@node alternate
+@section @option{--alternate}
+
+@kindex --alternate
+Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
+
+@node D
+@section @option{-D}
+
+@kindex -D
+This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
+likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
+@command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@node f
+@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
+
+@kindex -f
+@cindex trusted compiler
+@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
+@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
+(trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
+and comment preprocessing on
+the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
+,Preprocessing}.
+
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
+preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
+not work correctly.
+@end quotation
+
+@node I
+@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
+
+@kindex -I @var{path}
+@cindex paths for @code{.include}
+@cindex search path for @code{.include}
+@cindex @code{include} directive search path
+Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
+@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
+directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
+many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
+working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
+searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
+specified (left to right) on the command line.
+
+@node K
+@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
+
+@kindex -K
+@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
+permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
+where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
+generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
+family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
+alteration on other platforms.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+@cindex difference tables, warning
+@cindex warning for altered difference tables
+@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
+form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
+You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
+is done.
+@end ifset
+
+@node L
+@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
+
+@kindex -L
+@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
+Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
+@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
+called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
+such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
+programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
+notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
+such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
+
+This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
+in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
+@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
+
+@node listing
+@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
+
+The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
+@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
+hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
+them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
+directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
+@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
+@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
+@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
+@kindex --listing-lhs-width
+@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
+Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
+dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
+
+@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
+@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
+@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
+Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
+a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
+the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
+switch is used the default is to one.
+
+@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
+@kindex --listing-rhs-width
+@cindex Width of source line output
+Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
+alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
+source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
+
+@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
+@kindex --listing-cont-lines
+@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
+Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
+displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
+@end table
+
+@node M
+@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
+
+@kindex -M
+@cindex MRI compatibility mode
+The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
+changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
+compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
+The exact nature of the
+MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
+information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
+arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
+assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
+
+The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
+depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
+file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
+individually.  These are:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item global symbols in common section
+
+The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
+Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
+common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
+symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
+symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
+
+@item complex relocations
+
+The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
+relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
+are not support by other object file formats.
+
+@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
+
+The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
+This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
+instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
+script.
+
+@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
+
+The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
+name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
+
+@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
+
+The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
+address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
+which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
+not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
+assigned within a linker script.
+@end itemize
+
+There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
+@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
+seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item EBCDIC strings
+
+EBCDIC strings are not supported.
+
+@item packed binary coded decimal
+
+Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
+and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
+
+@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
+
+The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
+
+The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+@item @code{OPT} branch control options
+
+The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
+@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
+relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
+these options serve no purpose.
+
+@item @code{OPT} list control options
+
+The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
+@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
+@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
+
+@item other @code{OPT} options
+
+The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
+@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
+
+@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
+
+The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
+@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
+
+@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
+
+The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
+
+@end itemize
+
+@node MD
+@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
+
+@kindex --MD
+@cindex dependency tracking
+@cindex make rules
+
+@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
+file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
+dependencies of the main source file.
+
+The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
+
+This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
+
+@node no-pad-sections
+@section Output Section Padding
+@kindex --no-pad-sections
+@cindex output section padding
+Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
+alignment boundary.  But this can waste space, which can be significant on
+memory constrained targets.  So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
+disable this behaviour.
+
+@node o
+@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
+
+@kindex -o
+@cindex naming object file
+@cindex object file name
+There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
+default it has the name @file{a.out}.
+You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
+object file a different name.
+
+Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
+existing file of the same name.
+
+@node R
+@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
+
+@kindex -R
+@cindex data and text sections, joining
+@cindex text and data sections, joining
+@cindex joining text and data sections
+@cindex merging text and data sections
+@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
+data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
+the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
+section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
+your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
+appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
+
+When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
+address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
+data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
+older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
+
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
+this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
+@samp{.data}.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset HPPA
+@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
+@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
+@end ifset
+
+@node statistics
+@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
+
+@kindex --statistics
+@cindex statistics, about assembly
+@cindex time, total for assembly
+@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
+Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
+@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
+(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
+seconds).
+
+@node traditional-format
+@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
+
+@kindex --traditional-format
+For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
+from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
+@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
+
+For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
+@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
+
+@node v
+@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
+
+@kindex -v
+@kindex -version
+@cindex assembler version
+@cindex version of assembler
+You can find out what version of as is running by including the
+option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
+command line.
+
+@node W
+@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
+
+@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
+assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
+cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
+made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
+
+@kindex -W
+@kindex --no-warn
+@cindex suppressing warnings
+@cindex warnings, suppressing
+If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
+This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
+how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
+are still reported.
+
+@kindex --fatal-warnings
+@cindex errors, caused by warnings
+@cindex warnings, causing error
+If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
+files that generate warnings to be in error.
+
+@kindex --warn
+@cindex warnings, switching on
+You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
+causes warnings to be output as usual.
+
+@node Z
+@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
+@cindex object file, after errors
+@cindex errors, continuing after
+After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
+some reason you are interested in object file output even after
+@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
+option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
+writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
+errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
+
+@node Syntax
+@chapter Syntax
+
+@cindex machine-independent syntax
+@cindex syntax, machine-independent
+This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
+source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
+assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
+@ifclear VAX
+assembler.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset VAX
+assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
+@end ifset
+
+@menu
+* Preprocessing::               Preprocessing
+* Whitespace::                  Whitespace
+* Comments::                    Comments
+* Symbol Intro::                Symbols
+* Statements::                  Statements
+* Constants::                   Constants
+@end menu
+
+@node Preprocessing
+@section Preprocessing
+
+@cindex preprocessing
+The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
+@itemize @bullet
+@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
+@item
+adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
+the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
+a single space.
+
+@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
+@item
+removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
+appropriate number of newlines.
+
+@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
+@item
+converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
+@end itemize
+
+It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
+anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
+do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
+(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
+to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
+@samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
+Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
+
+Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
+cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
+preprocessed.
+
+@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
+@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
+@kindex #NO_APP
+@kindex #APP
+If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
+@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
+Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
+specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
+text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
+@code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
+@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
+and whitespace.
+
+@node Whitespace
+@section Whitespace
+
+@cindex whitespace
+@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
+Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
+people to read.  Unless within character constants
+(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
+as exactly one space.
+
+@node Comments
+@section Comments
+
+@cindex comments
+There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
+cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
+
+Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
+This means you may not nest these comments.
+
+@smallexample
+/*
+  The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
+  is to use this sort of comment.
+*/
+
+/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
+@end smallexample
+
+@cindex line comment character
+Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
+considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is target
+specific, and some targets multiple comment characters.  Some targets also have
+line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
+line.  Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
+comment.  Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
+upon command line options that have been used.  For more details see the
+@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
+
+If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
+special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
+to specify logical line numbers:
+
+@kindex #
+@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
+@cindex logical line numbers
+To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
+special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
+expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
+line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
+new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
+
+If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
+the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
+
+@smallexample
+                          # This is an ordinary comment.
+# 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
+                          # This is logical line # 36.
+@end smallexample
+This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
+of @command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@node Symbol Intro
+@section Symbols
+
+@cindex characters used in symbols
+@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
+A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
+letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
+@samp{_.$}.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset H8
+A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
+letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
+@samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
+symbol names.)
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+@ifset GENERIC
+On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
+are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
+@end ifset
+No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
+There is no length limit; all characters are significant.  Multibyte characters
+are supported.  Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
+beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
+of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
+
+Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters.  In such
+cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character.  If a double
+quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
+backslash @code{\} character.
+@cindex length of symbols
+
+@node Statements
+@section Statements
+
+@cindex statements, structure of
+@cindex line separator character
+@cindex statement separator character
+
+A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
+@dfn{line separator character}.  The line separator character is target
+specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
+target's documentation.  Not all targets support a line separator character.
+The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
+preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
+exception: they do not end statements.
+
+@cindex newline, required at file end
+@cindex EOF, newline must precede
+It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
+character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
+
+An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
+
+@cindex instructions and directives
+@cindex directives and instructions
+@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
+@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc@cygnus.com,
+@c 13feb91.
+A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
+key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
+symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
+symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
+directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
+a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
+assembles into a machine language instruction.
+@ifset GENERIC
+Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
+recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
+represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
+language.@refill
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex @code{:} (label)
+@cindex label (@code{:})
+A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
+Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
+have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
+
+@ifset HPPA
+For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
+the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
+only one label may be defined on each line.
+@end ifset
+
+@smallexample
+label:     .directive    followed by something
+another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
+           instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Constants
+@section Constants
+
+@cindex constants
+A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
+inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
+@smallexample
+@group
+.byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
+.ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
+.octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
+.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
+95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+@menu
+* Characters::                  Character Constants
+* Numbers::                     Number Constants
+@end menu
+
+@node Characters
+@subsection Character Constants
+
+@cindex character constants
+@cindex constants, character
+There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
+for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
+numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
+@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
+used in arithmetic expressions.
+
+@menu
+* Strings::                     Strings
+* Chars::                       Characters
+@end menu
+
+@node Strings
+@subsubsection Strings
+
+@cindex string constants
+@cindex constants, string
+A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
+double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
+into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
+a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
+one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
+@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
+(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
+escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
+
+@cindex escape codes, character
+@cindex character escape codes
+@c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
+@c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
+@c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
+@c NOTE:   \initial {\\}
+@c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
+@c NOTE:   Argument of \\ has an extra }.
+@c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
+@c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
+@table @kbd
+@c      @item \a
+@c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
+@c
+@cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
+@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
+@item \b
+Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
+
+@c      @item \e
+@c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
+@c
+@cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
+@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
+@item backslash-f
+Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
+
+@cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
+@cindex newline (@code{\n})
+@item \n
+Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
+
+@c      @item \p
+@c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
+@c
+@cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
+@cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
+@item \r
+Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
+
+@c      @item \s
+@c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
+@c      other assemblers.
+@c
+@cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
+@cindex tab (@code{\t})
+@item \t
+Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
+
+@c      @item \v
+@c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
+@c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
+@c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
+@c
+@cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
+@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
+@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
+An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
+For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
+for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
+
+@cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
+@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
+@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
+A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
+lower case @code{x} works.
+
+@cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
+@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
+@item \\
+Represents one @samp{\} character.
+
+@c      @item \'
+@c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
+@c      This is needed in single character literals
+@c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
+@c      a @samp{'}.
+@c
+@cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
+@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
+@item \"
+Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
+this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
+
+@item \ @var{anything-else}
+Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
+assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
+you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
+interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
+other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
+code and warns you of the fact.
+@end table
+
+Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
+varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
+the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
+compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
+sequence.
+
+@node Chars
+@subsubsection Characters
+
+@cindex single character constant
+@cindex character, single
+@cindex constant, single character
+A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
+that character.  Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
+@code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
+as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote.  So if you want to write the
+character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
+the second @code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
+accent.  A newline
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifclear abnormal-separator
+(or semicolon @samp{;})
+@end ifclear
+@ifset abnormal-separator
+@ifset H8
+(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
+Renesas SH)
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
+and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
+constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
+that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
+@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
+
+@node Numbers
+@subsection Number Constants
+
+@cindex constants, number
+@cindex number constants
+@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
+are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
+would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
+integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
+are floating point numbers, described below.
+
+@menu
+* Integers::                    Integers
+* Bignums::                     Bignums
+* Flonums::                     Flonums
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@end ifclear
+@end menu
+
+@node Integers
+@subsubsection Integers
+@cindex integers
+@cindex constants, integer
+
+@cindex binary integers
+@cindex integers, binary
+A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
+the binary digits @samp{01}.
+
+@cindex octal integers
+@cindex integers, octal
+An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
+digits (@samp{01234567}).
+
+@cindex decimal integers
+@cindex integers, decimal
+A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
+more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
+
+@cindex hexadecimal integers
+@cindex integers, hexadecimal
+A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
+more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
+
+Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
+the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
+(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
+
+@node Bignums
+@subsubsection Bignums
+
+@cindex bignums
+@cindex constants, bignum
+A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
+except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
+represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
+integers are permitted while bignums are not.
+
+@node Flonums
+@subsubsection Flonums
+@cindex flonums
+@cindex floating point numbers
+@cindex constants, floating point
+
+@cindex precision, floating point
+A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
+indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
+@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
+sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
+to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
+portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
+
+A flonum is written by writing (in order)
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+The digit @samp{0}.
+@ifset HPPA
+(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
+@end ifset
+
+@item
+A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
+@ifset GENERIC
+@kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
+@ignore
+@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
+(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
+4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
+@end ignore
+
+On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
+one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
+
+On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
+(in upper or lower case).
+
+On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset ARC
+One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
+@end ifset
+@ifset H8
+One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
+@end ifset
+@ifset HPPA
+The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@item
+An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
+
+@item
+An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
+
+@item
+An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
+or more decimal digits.
+
+@item
+An optional exponent, consisting of:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
+@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
+@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
+@item
+Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
+@item
+One or more decimal digits.
+@end itemize
+
+@end itemize
+
+At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
+present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
+
+@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
+independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
+@command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@node Sections
+@chapter Sections and Relocation
+@cindex sections
+@cindex relocation
+
+@menu
+* Secs Background::             Background
+* Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
+* As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
+* Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
+* bss::                         bss Section
+@end menu
+
+@node Secs Background
+@section Background
+
+Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
+``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
+For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
+
+@cindex linker, and assembler
+@cindex assembler, and linker
+The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
+combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
+emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
+@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
+different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
+oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
+sections.
+
+@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
+addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
+units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
+within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
+run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
+the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
+the proper run-time addresses.
+@ifset H8
+For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
+@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
+ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex standard assembler sections
+An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
+of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
+@dfn{bss} sections.
+
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+@ifset GENERIC
+When it generates COFF or ELF output,
+@end ifset
+@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
+using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
+If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
+or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset HPPA
+@ifset GENERIC
+When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
+@end ifset
+@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
+specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
+@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
+(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
+assembler directives.
+
+@ifset SOM
+Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
+text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
+is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
+BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
+data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
+
+@ifset HPPA
+When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
+section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
+@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
+@end ifset
+
+To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
+relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
+object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
+@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
+file is mentioned:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
+an address?
+@item
+How long (in bytes) is this reference?
+@item
+Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
+@display
+(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
+@end display
+@item
+Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex addresses, format of
+@cindex section-relative addressing
+In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
+@display
+(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
+@end display
+@noindent
+Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
+nature.
+@ifset SOM
+(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
+symbol-relative instead.)
+@end ifset
+
+In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
+@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
+
+Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
+@dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
+addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
+@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
+@code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
+data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
+their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
+part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
+address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
+
+The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
+address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
+rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
+Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
+address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
+common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
+time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
+
+By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
+the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
+sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
+customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
+the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
+data and bss sections.
+
+Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
+use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
+
+@node Ld Sections
+@section Linker Sections
+@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
+
+@table @strong
+
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+@cindex named sections
+@cindex sections, named
+@item named sections
+@end ifset
+@ifset aout
+@cindex text section
+@cindex data section
+@itemx text section
+@itemx data section
+@end ifset
+These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
+separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
+true of another.
+@c @ifset aout
+When the program is running, however, it is
+customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
+text section is often shared among processes: it contains
+instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
+program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
+in the data section.
+@c @end ifset
+
+@cindex bss section
+@item bss section
+This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
+is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
+each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
+out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
+bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
+those explicit zeros from object files.
+
+@cindex absolute section
+@item absolute section
+Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
+This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
+not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
+addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
+
+@cindex undefined section
+@item undefined section
+This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
+the preceding sections.
+@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
+@end table
+
+@cindex relocation example
+An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
+@end ifset
+Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
+
+@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@ifnottex
+@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@smallexample
+                      +-----+----+--+
+partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
+                      +-----+----+--+
+
+                      text   data bss
+                      seg.   seg. seg.
+
+                      +---+---+---+
+partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
+                      +---+---+---+
+
+                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
+linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
+                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
+
+    addresses:        0 @dots{}
+@end smallexample
+@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+@end ifnottex
+@need 5000
+@tex
+\bigskip
+\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
+\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
+\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
+
+\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
+\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
+\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
+
+\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
+\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
+\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
+ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
+DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
+
+\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
+\line{0\dots\hfil}
+
+@end tex
+@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
+
+@node As Sections
+@section Assembler Internal Sections
+
+@cindex internal assembler sections
+@cindex sections in messages, internal
+These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
+have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
+sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
+warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
+meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
+value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
+section-relative address.
+
+@table @b
+@cindex assembler internal logic error
+@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
+An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
+bug in the assembler.
+
+@cindex expr (internal section)
+@item expr section
+The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
+symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
+it in the expr section.
+@c FIXME item debug
+@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
+@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
+@c FIXME item register
+@end table
+
+@node Sub-Sections
+@section Sub-Sections
+
+@cindex numbered subsections
+@cindex grouping data
+@ifset aout
+Assembled bytes
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+conventionally
+@end ifset
+fall into two sections: text and data.
+@end ifset
+You may have separate groups of
+@ifset GENERIC
+data in named sections
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifclear aout
+data in named sections
+@end ifclear
+@ifset aout
+text or data
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
+are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
+use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
+numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
+same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
+subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
+section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
+assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
+section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
+constants being output.
+
+Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
+goes in subsection number zero.
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
+(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
+of @command{@value{AS}}.)
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset H8
+On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
+boundary (two bytes).
+The same is true on the Renesas SH.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
+to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
+The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
+other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
+They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
+data subsections as a data section.
+
+To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
+into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
+@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
+@ifset COFF
+@ifset GENERIC
+When generating COFF output, you
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+You
+@end ifclear
+can also use an extra subsection
+argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
+@var{expression}}.
+@end ifset
+@ifset ELF
+@ifset GENERIC
+When generating ELF output, you
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+You
+@end ifclear
+can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
+to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
+@end ifset
+@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
+(@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
+is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
+begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
+@smallexample
+.text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
+.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
+.text 1
+.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
+.data 0
+.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
+.ascii "in the first data subsection."
+.text 0
+.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
+.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
+@end smallexample
+
+Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
+assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
+restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
+counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
+@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
+current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
+assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
+
+@node bss
+@section bss Section
+
+@cindex bss section
+@cindex common variable storage
+The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
+You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
+not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
+your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
+section are zeroed bytes.
+
+The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
+@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
+
+The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
+another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
+COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
+see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
+section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
+@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
+@end ifset
+
+@node Symbols
+@chapter Symbols
+
+@cindex symbols
+Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
+things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
+to debug.
+
+@quotation
+@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
+@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
+the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
+@end quotation
+
+@menu
+* Labels::                      Labels
+* Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
+* Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
+* Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
+* Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
+@end menu
+
+@node Labels
+@section Labels
+
+@cindex labels
+A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
+@samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
+active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
+operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
+different locations: the first definition overrides any other
+definitions.
+
+@ifset HPPA
+On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
+colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
+a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
+provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Setting Symbols
+@section Giving Symbols Other Values
+
+@cindex assigning values to symbols
+@cindex symbol values, assigning
+A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
+by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
+(@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
+directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
+equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
+@code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
+
+@ifset Blackfin
+Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Symbol Names
+@section Symbol Names
+
+@cindex symbol names
+@cindex names, symbol
+@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
+Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
+machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
+noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
+string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
+particular target machine), and underscores.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
+@ifset H8
+Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
+Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
+character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
+on the H8/300), and underscores.
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
+than @code{Foo}.
+
+Symbol names do not start with a digit.  An exception to this rule is made for
+Local Labels.  See below.
+
+Multibyte characters are supported.  To generate a symbol name containing
+multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
+@xref{Strings}.  Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
+currently supported.
+
+Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
+refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
+in a program.
+
+@subheading Local Symbol Names
+
+@cindex local symbol names
+@cindex symbol names, local
+A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
+By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
+@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
+set of local label prefixes.
+@ifset HPPA
+On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
+@end ifset
+
+Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
+normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
+You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
+to retain the local symbols in the object files.
+
+@subheading Local Labels
+
+@cindex local labels
+@cindex temporary symbol names
+@cindex symbol names, temporary
+Local labels are different from local symbols.  Local labels help compilers and
+programmers use names temporarily.  They create symbols which are guaranteed to
+be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
+referred to by a simple notation.  To define a local label, write a label of
+the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
+To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
+@samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label.  To refer
+to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}.  The @samp{b}
+stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
+
+There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
+too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
+the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
+defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
+definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
+noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
+implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
+
+Here is an example:
+
+@smallexample
+1:        branch 1f
+2:        branch 1b
+1:        branch 2f
+2:        branch 1b
+@end smallexample
+
+Which is the equivalent of:
+
+@smallexample
+label_1:  branch label_3
+label_2:  branch label_1
+label_3:  branch label_4
+label_4:  branch label_3
+@end smallexample
+
+Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
+transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
+The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
+are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
+these parts:
+
+@table @code
+@item @emph{local label prefix}
+All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
+Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
+that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
+used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
+@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
+object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
+you may use them in debugging.
+
+@item @var{number}
+This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
+label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
+
+@item @kbd{C-B}
+This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
+of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
+
+@item @emph{ordinal number}
+This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
+@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
+number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
+the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
+@end table
+
+So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
+the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
+
+@subheading Dollar Local Labels
+@cindex dollar local symbols
+
+On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
+local labels called dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
+become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain
+valid for only a small region of the input source code.  Normal local labels,
+by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
+by another occurrence of the same local label.
+
+Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
+except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
+@samp{@b{55$:}}.
+
+They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
+names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
+to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
+@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
+
+@node Dot
+@section The Special Dot Symbol
+
+@cindex dot (symbol)
+@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
+@cindex current address
+@cindex location counter
+The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
+@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
+.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
+Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
+directive.
+@ifclear no-space-dir
+Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
+@samp{.space 4}.
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Symbol Attributes
+@section Symbol Attributes
+
+@cindex symbol attributes
+@cindex attributes, symbol
+Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
+``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
+attributes.
+@ifset INTERNALS
+The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
+@end ifset
+
+If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
+all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
+symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
+would want.
+
+@menu
+* Symbol Value::                Value
+* Symbol Type::                 Type
+@ifset aout
+* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
+@end ifset
+@ifset COFF
+* COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
+@end ifset
+@ifset SOM
+* SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
+@end ifset
+@end menu
+
+@node Symbol Value
+@subsection Value
+
+@cindex value of a symbol
+@cindex symbol value
+The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
+location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
+number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
+Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
+as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
+symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
+called absolute.
+
+The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
+0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
+@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
+same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
+name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
+common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
+bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
+allocated storage.
+
+@node Symbol Type
+@subsection Type
+
+@cindex type of a symbol
+@cindex symbol type
+The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
+information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
+(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
+format depends on the object-code output format in use.
+
+@ifset aout
+@node a.out Symbols
+@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
+
+@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
+@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
+
+@menu
+* Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
+* Symbol Other::                Other
+@end menu
+
+@node Symbol Desc
+@subsubsection Descriptor
+
+@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
+This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
+descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
+(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
+@command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@node Symbol Other
+@subsubsection Other
+
+@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
+This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node COFF Symbols
+@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
+
+@cindex COFF symbol attributes
+@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
+
+The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
+like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
+@code{.endef} directives.
+
+@subsubsection Primary Attributes
+
+@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
+The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
+respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
+
+@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
+
+@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
+The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
+@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
+table information for COFF.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset SOM
+@node SOM Symbols
+@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
+
+@cindex SOM symbol attributes
+@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
+
+The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
+the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
+
+The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
+Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
+@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Expressions
+@chapter Expressions
+
+@cindex expressions
+@cindex addresses
+@cindex numeric values
+An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
+Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
+
+The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
+a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
+enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
+section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
+the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
+@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
+
+@menu
+* Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
+* Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
+@end menu
+
+@node Empty Exprs
+@section Empty Expressions
+
+@cindex empty expressions
+@cindex expressions, empty
+An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
+Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
+expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
+is compatible with other assemblers.
+
+@node Integer Exprs
+@section Integer Expressions
+
+@cindex integer expressions
+@cindex expressions, integer
+An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
+by @emph{operators}.
+
+@menu
+* Arguments::                   Arguments
+* Operators::                   Operators
+* Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
+* Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
+@end menu
+
+@node Arguments
+@subsection Arguments
+
+@cindex expression arguments
+@cindex arguments in expressions
+@cindex operands in expressions
+@cindex arithmetic operands
+@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
+contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
+this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
+the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
+expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
+instruction operands.
+
+Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
+@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
+or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
+integer.
+
+Numbers are usually integers.
+
+A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
+that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
+these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
+instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
+assemblers.
+
+@cindex subexpressions
+Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
+expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
+operator followed by an argument.
+
+@node Operators
+@subsection Operators
+
+@cindex operators, in expressions
+@cindex arithmetic functions
+@cindex functions, in expressions
+@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
+operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
+between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
+whitespace.
+
+@node Prefix Ops
+@subsection Prefix Operator
+
+@cindex prefix operators
+@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
+one argument, which must be absolute.
+
+@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
+@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
+@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
+@tex
+\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+@end tex
+
+@table @code
+@item -
+@dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
+@item ~
+@dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
+@end table
+
+@tex
+\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
+@end tex
+
+@node Infix Ops
+@subsection Infix Operators
+
+@cindex infix operators
+@cindex operators, permitted arguments
+@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
+have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
+to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
+absolute, and the result is absolute.
+
+@enumerate
+@cindex operator precedence
+@cindex precedence of operators
+
+@item
+Highest Precedence
+
+@table @code
+@item *
+@dfn{Multiplication}.
+
+@item /
+@dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
+
+@item %
+@dfn{Remainder}.
+
+@item <<
+@dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
+
+@item >>
+@dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
+@end table
+
+@item
+Intermediate precedence
+
+@table @code
+@item |
+
+@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
+
+@item &
+@dfn{Bitwise And}.
+
+@item ^
+@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
+
+@item !
+@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
+@end table
+
+@item
+Low Precedence
+
+@table @code
+@cindex addition, permitted arguments
+@cindex plus, permitted arguments
+@cindex arguments for addition
+@item +
+@dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
+the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
+sections.
+
+@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
+@cindex minus, permitted arguments
+@cindex arguments for subtraction
+@item -
+@dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
+result has the section of the left argument.
+If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
+You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
+@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
+
+@cindex comparison expressions
+@cindex expressions, comparison
+@item  ==
+@dfn{Is Equal To}
+@item <>
+@itemx !=
+@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
+@item <
+@dfn{Is Less Than}
+@item >
+@dfn{Is Greater Than}
+@item >=
+@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
+@item <=
+@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
+
+The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
+value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
+perform signed comparisons.
+@end table
+
+@item Lowest Precedence
+
+@table @code
+@item &&
+@dfn{Logical And}.
+
+@item ||
+@dfn{Logical Or}.
+
+These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
+expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
+value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
+or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
+
+@end table
+@end enumerate
+
+In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
+address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
+
+@node Pseudo Ops
+@chapter Assembler Directives
+
+@cindex directives, machine independent
+@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
+@cindex machine independent directives
+All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
+The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
+in lower case.
+
+This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
+target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
+@ifset GENERIC
+Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
+@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset machine-directives
+@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@menu
+* Abort::                       @code{.abort}
+@ifset COFF
+* ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
+@end ifset
+
+* Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
+* Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
+* Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
+* Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
+* Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
+* Bundle directives::           @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
+* Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
+* CFI directives::		@code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
+* Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
+* Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
+* Dc::                          @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
+* Dcb::                         @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
+* Ds::                          @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
+@ifset COFF
+* Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
+@end ifset
+@ifset aout
+* Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
+@end ifset
+@ifset COFF
+* Dim::                         @code{.dim}
+@end ifset
+
+* Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
+* Eject::                       @code{.eject}
+* Else::                        @code{.else}
+* Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
+* End::				@code{.end}
+@ifset COFF
+* Endef::                       @code{.endef}
+@end ifset
+
+* Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
+* Endif::                       @code{.endif}
+* Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+* Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+* Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+* Err::				@code{.err}
+* Error::			@code{.error @var{string}}
+* Exitm::			@code{.exitm}
+* Extern::                      @code{.extern}
+* Fail::			@code{.fail}
+* File::                        @code{.file}
+* Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
+* Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
+* Func::                        @code{.func}
+* Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
+@ifset ELF
+* Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
+* Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
+@end ifset
+
+* hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
+* Ident::                       @code{.ident}
+* If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
+* Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
+* Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
+* Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
+@ifset ELF
+* Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
+@end ifset
+
+* Irp::				@code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
+* Irpc::			@code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
+* Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
+* Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
+@ifclear no-line-dir
+* Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
+@end ifclear
+
+* Linkonce::			@code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
+* List::                        @code{.list}
+* Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
+* Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
+* Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
+@ifset ELF
+* Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
+@end ifset
+
+* Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
+@ignore
+* Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+@end ignore
+
+* Macro::			@code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
+* MRI::				@code{.mri @var{val}}
+* Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
+* Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
+* Nops::                        @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
+* Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
+* Offset::			@code{.offset @var{loc}}
+* Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
+* P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
+@ifset ELF
+* PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
+* Previous::                    @code{.previous}
+@end ifset
+
+* Print::			@code{.print @var{string}}
+@ifset ELF
+* Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
+@end ifset
+
+* Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
+* Purgem::			@code{.purgem @var{name}}
+@ifset ELF
+* PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
+@end ifset
+
+* Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
+* Reloc::			@code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
+* Rept::			@code{.rept @var{count}}
+* Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
+@ifset COFF
+* Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
+@end ifset
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+* Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
+@end ifset
+
+* Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+* Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
+* Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+* Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
+@end ifset
+@ifclear no-space-dir
+* Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
+@end ifclear
+
+* Sleb128::			@code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
+@ifclear no-space-dir
+* Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
+@end ifclear
+@ifset have-stabs
+* Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
+@end ifset
+
+* String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
+* Struct::			@code{.struct @var{expression}}
+@ifset ELF
+* SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
+* Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset COFF
+* Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
+@end ifset
+
+* Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
+* Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+* Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
+@end ifset
+
+* Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
+@ifset COFF
+* Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+* Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
+* VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
+* VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
+@end ifset
+
+* Warning::			@code{.warning @var{string}}
+* Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
+* Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
+* Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
+@ifclear no-space-dir
+* Zero::                        @code{.zero @var{size}}
+@end ifclear
+@ifset ELF
+* 2byte::                       @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
+* 4byte::                       @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
+* 8byte::                       @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
+@end ifset
+* Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
+@end menu
+
+@node Abort
+@section @code{.abort}
+
+@cindex @code{abort} directive
+@cindex stopping the assembly
+This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
+compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
+assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
+of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
+quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node ABORT (COFF)
+@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
+
+@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
+When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
+synonym for @samp{.abort}.
+
+@end ifset
+
+@node Align
+@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
+
+@cindex padding the location counter
+@cindex @code{align} directive
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
+boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
+required, as described below.
+
+The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
+padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
+padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on most systems, if the section is
+marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
+with no-op instructions.
+
+The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
+it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
+directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
+specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
+fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
+required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
+with no-op instructions when appropriate.
+
+The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
+For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
+s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
+alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
+the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
+first expression is the alignment request in words.
+
+For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
+strongarm, it is the
+number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
+advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
+counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
+multiple of 8, no change is needed.
+
+This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
+native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
+GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
+described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
+architectures (but are specific to GAS).
+
+@node Altmacro
+@section @code{.altmacro}
+Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
+
+@ftable @code
+@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
+One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
+generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
+replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
+replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
+separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
+define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
+
+@item String delimiters
+You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
+@code{"@var{string}"}:
+
+@table @code
+@item '@var{string}'
+You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
+
+@item <@var{string}>
+You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
+@end table
+
+@item single-character string escape
+To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
+character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
+character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
+write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
+
+@item Expression results as strings
+You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
+and use the result as a string.
+@end ftable
+
+@node Ascii
+@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
+
+@cindex @code{ascii} directive
+@cindex string literals
+@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
+separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
+trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
+
+@node Asciz
+@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
+
+@cindex @code{asciz} directive
+@cindex zero-terminated strings
+@cindex null-terminated strings
+@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
+a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
+
+@node Balign
+@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
+
+@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
+@cindex @code{balign} directive
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
+the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
+
+The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
+padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
+padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on most systems, if the section is
+marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
+with no-op instructions.
+
+The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
+it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
+directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
+specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
+fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
+required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
+with no-op instructions when appropriate.
+
+@cindex @code{balignw} directive
+@cindex @code{balignl} directive
+The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
+@code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
+pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
+fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
+4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
+filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
+the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
+undefined.
+
+@node Bundle directives
+@section Bundle directives
+@subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
+@cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
+@cindex bundle
+@cindex instruction bundle
+@cindex aligned instruction bundle
+@code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
+bundle} mode.  In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
+into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}.  If the argument is zero, this mode is
+disabled (which is the default state).  If the argument it not zero, it
+gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
+@code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
+
+For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
+certain aligned boundary.  A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
+instructions that starts on an aligned boundary.  For example, if
+@var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
+chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle.  When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
+effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles.  If an
+instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
+that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
+end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
+starts in the next bundle.  As a corollary, it's an error if any single
+instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
+
+@subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
+@cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
+@cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
+The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
+allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding.  These directives
+are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
+aligned instruction bundle mode.  It's an error if they appear when
+@code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
+directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
+
+@cindex bundle-locked
+For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
+appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
+instructions, all within the same bundle.  A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
+and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
+instruction sequence.  For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
+sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
+@code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction.  That is, the
+entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
+boundary.  If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
+first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
+aligned bundle boundary.  It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
+bundle size.
+
+For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
+inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
+nested.  That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
+@code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
+matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
+same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
+
+@node Byte
+@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{byte} directive
+@cindex integers, one byte
+@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
+Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
+
+@node CFI directives
+@section CFI directives
+@subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
+@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
+@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
+should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
+If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
+if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
+To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
+directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
+
+On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
+by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
+
+Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
+which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
+
+The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
+arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started.  Once CFI
+generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
+redefine it will result in an error.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
+@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
+@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
+should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
+data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
+@code{.cfi_endproc}.
+
+Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
+it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
+@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
+@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
+unwind entry previously opened by
+@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
+@cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
+@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
+@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
+should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
+argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
+a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
+the symbol provided should be the location where personality
+can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
+The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
+no personality routine.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
+@cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
+@code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
+defined in a compact unwinding format.
+Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
+with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
+@cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
+@code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
+used for the current function.  These are emitted inline in the
+@code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
+in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
+Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
+with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
+@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
+@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
+should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
+argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
+or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
+meaning that no LSDA is present.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
+@code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
+switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
+Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
+Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
+with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
+
+The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
+so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data.  The symbol
+referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
+in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used.  The LSDA data is terminated
+by a section directive.
+
+The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
+The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
+@code{.p2align} directive.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
+@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
+address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
+@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
+now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
+remains the same.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
+@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
+remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
+absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
+CFA address.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
+Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
+value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
+Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
+CFA.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
+Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
+Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
+the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
+using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
+This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
+code it's annotating.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
+Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
+@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
+same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
+instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
+From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
+Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
+i.e. no restoration needed.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
+@code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
+implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
+places them in the current row.  This is useful for situations where you have
+multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
+flow of the program.  For example, we could have something like this (assuming
+the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
+
+@smallexample
+        je label
+        popq %rbx
+        .cfi_restore %rbx
+        popq %r12
+        .cfi_restore %r12
+        popq %rbp
+        .cfi_restore %rbp
+        .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
+        ret
+label:
+        /* Do something else */
+@end smallexample
+
+Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
+to the instructions before @code{label}.  This means we'd have to add multiple
+@code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
+locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
+@code{rbp}.  This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
+we can write:
+
+@smallexample
+        je label
+        popq %rbx
+        .cfi_remember_state
+        .cfi_restore %rbx
+        popq %r12
+        .cfi_restore %r12
+        popq %rbp
+        .cfi_restore %rbp
+        .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
+        ret
+label:
+        .cfi_restore_state
+        /* Do something else */
+@end smallexample
+
+That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
+as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
+@code{.cfi} directives.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
+Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
+directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
+Mark current function as signal trampoline.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
+SPARC register window has been saved.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
+Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
+might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
+opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
+
+@subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
+The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
+will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
+description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
+
+The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
+limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
+mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
+by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
+or another register.
+
+@node Comm
+@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
+
+@cindex @code{comm} directive
+@cindex symbol, common
+@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
+common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
+of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
+definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
+allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
+absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
+the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
+using the largest size.
+
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
+an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
+specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
+that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
+as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
+boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
+power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
+common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
+alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
+largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
+maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
+is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
+@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
+multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
+It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
+(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset HPPA
+The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
+@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Data
+@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
+@cindex @code{data} directive
+
+@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
+end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
+absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
+to zero.
+
+@node Dc
+@section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
+@cindex @code{dc} directive
+
+The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
+commas.  These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
+current section.  The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
+@code{.dc} directive:
+
+@table @code
+@item @samp{.a}
+Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
+@item @samp{.b}
+Emits 8-bit values.
+@item @samp{.d}
+Emits double precision floating-point values.
+@item @samp{.l}
+Emits 32-bit values.
+@item @samp{.s}
+Emits single precision floating-point values.
+@item @samp{.w}
+Emits 16-bit values.
+Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
+32-bit values.
+@item @samp{.x}
+Emits long double precision floating-point values.
+@end table
+
+If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
+
+The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
+point values.
+
+@node Dcb
+@section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
+@cindex @code{dcb} directive
+This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
+bytes.  Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the
+comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  The
+@var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
+
+@table @code
+@item @samp{.b}
+Emits single byte values.
+@item @samp{.d}
+Emits double-precision floating point values.
+@item @samp{.l}
+Emits 4-byte values.
+@item @samp{.s}
+Emits single-precision floating point values.
+@item @samp{.w}
+Emits 2-byte values.
+@item @samp{.x}
+Emits long double-precision floating point values.
+@end table
+
+If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
+
+The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
+point values.
+
+@node Ds
+@section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
+@cindex @code{ds} directive
+This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
+bytes.  Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the
+comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  The
+@var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
+
+@table @code
+@item @samp{.b}
+Emits single byte values.
+@item @samp{.d}
+Emits 8-byte values.
+@item @samp{.l}
+Emits 4-byte values.
+@item @samp{.p}
+Emits 12-byte values.
+@item @samp{.s}
+Emits 4-byte values.
+@item @samp{.w}
+Emits 2-byte values.
+@item @samp{.x}
+Emits 12-byte values.
+@end table
+
+Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
+suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
+
+If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
+
+The byte ordering is target dependent.
+
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node Def
+@section @code{.def @var{name}}
+
+@cindex @code{def} directive
+@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
+@cindex debugging COFF symbols
+Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
+definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset aout
+@node Desc
+@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
+
+@cindex @code{desc} directive
+@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
+@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
+This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
+to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
+
+@ifset COFF
+The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
+configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
+object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
+it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node Dim
+@section @code{.dim}
+
+@cindex @code{dim} directive
+@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
+@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
+This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
+information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
+@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Double
+@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
+
+@cindex @code{double} directive
+@cindex floating point numbers (double)
+@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+assembles floating point numbers.
+@ifset GENERIC
+The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
+@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset IEEEFLOAT
+On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
+in @sc{ieee} format.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Eject
+@section @code{.eject}
+
+@cindex @code{eject} directive
+@cindex new page, in listings
+@cindex page, in listings
+@cindex listing control: new page
+Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
+
+@node Else
+@section @code{.else}
+
+@cindex @code{else} directive
+@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
+assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
+of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
+was false.
+
+@node Elseif
+@section @code{.elseif}
+
+@cindex @code{elseif} directive
+@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
+assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
+@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
+
+@node End
+@section @code{.end}
+
+@cindex @code{end} directive
+@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
+process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node Endef
+@section @code{.endef}
+
+@cindex @code{endef} directive
+This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
+@code{.def}.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Endfunc
+@section @code{.endfunc}
+@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
+@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
+
+@node Endif
+@section @code{.endif}
+
+@cindex @code{endif} directive
+@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
+it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
+conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
+
+@node Equ
+@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+
+@cindex @code{equ} directive
+@cindex assigning values to symbols
+@cindex symbols, assigning values to
+This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
+It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
+
+@ifset HPPA
+The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
+@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset Z80
+The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
+@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
+On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
+but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
+Compare @ref{Equiv}.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Equiv
+@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+@cindex @code{equiv} directive
+The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
+the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
+symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
+undefined.
+
+Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
+@smallexample
+.ifdef SYM
+.err
+.endif
+.equ SYM,VAL
+@end smallexample
+plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
+
+@node Eqv
+@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+@cindex @code{eqv} directive
+The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
+evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
+the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
+value is taken.
+
+@node Err
+@section @code{.err}
+@cindex @code{err} directive
+If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
+message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
+object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
+
+@node Error
+@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
+@cindex error directive
+
+Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
+string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
+message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
+@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
+
+@smallexample
+ .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Exitm
+@section @code{.exitm}
+Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
+
+@node Extern
+@section @code{.extern}
+
+@cindex @code{extern} directive
+@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
+with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
+all undefined symbols as external.
+
+@node Fail
+@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
+
+@cindex @code{fail} directive
+Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
+or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
+than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
+include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
+complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
+
+@node File
+@section @code{.file}
+@cindex @code{file} directive
+
+@ifclear no-file-dir
+There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
+that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
+@code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
+
+@subheading Default Version
+
+@cindex logical file name
+@cindex file name, logical
+This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
+are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
+
+@smallexample
+.file @var{string}
+@end smallexample
+
+@var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
+recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
+to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
+statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
+old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
+
+@subheading DWARF2 Version
+@end ifclear
+
+When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
+to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
+
+@smallexample
+.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
+@end smallexample
+
+The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
+index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
+literal.
+
+The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
+table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
+information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
+entries will have.
+
+@node Fill
+@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
+
+@cindex @code{fill} directive
+@cindex writing patterns in memory
+@cindex patterns, writing in memory
+@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
+This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
+may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
+more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
+other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
+is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
+zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
+byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
+Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
+@var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
+compatible with other people's assemblers.
+
+@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
+If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
+assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
+@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
+
+@node Float
+@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
+
+@cindex floating point numbers (single)
+@cindex @code{float} directive
+This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+has the same effect as @code{.single}.
+@ifset GENERIC
+The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
+@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
+@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset IEEEFLOAT
+On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
+in @sc{ieee} format.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Func
+@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
+@cindex @code{func} directive
+@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
+is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
+Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
+@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
+prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
+@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
+All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
+The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
+
+@node Global
+@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
+
+@cindex @code{global} directive
+@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
+@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
+@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
+other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
+@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
+from another file linked into the same program.
+
+Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
+compatibility with other assemblers.
+
+@ifset HPPA
+On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
+partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
+@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Gnu_attribute
+@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
+Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
+
+@node Hidden
+@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
+
+@cindex @code{hidden} directive
+@cindex visibility
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
+@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
+
+This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
+their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
+@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
+Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
+@end ifset
+
+@node hword
+@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{hword} directive
+@cindex integers, 16-bit
+@cindex numbers, 16-bit
+@cindex sixteen bit integers
+This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
+a 16 bit number for each.
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
+architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset W32
+This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
+@end ifset
+@ifset W16
+This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Ident
+@section @code{.ident}
+
+@cindex @code{ident} directive
+
+This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
+behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
+a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
+source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
+for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
+@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
+emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
+
+@node If
+@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
+
+@cindex conditional assembly
+@cindex @code{if} directive
+@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
+considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
+(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
+the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
+(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
+alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
+If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
+nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
+
+The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
+@table @code
+@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
+@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
+Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
+has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
+is considered to be undefined.
+
+@cindex @code{ifb} directive
+@item .ifb @var{text}
+Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
+
+@cindex @code{ifc} directive
+@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
+Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
+strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
+the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
+end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
+string comparison is case sensitive.
+
+@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
+@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
+Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
+
+@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
+@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
+Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
+
+@cindex @code{ifge} directive
+@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
+Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
+equal to zero.
+
+@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
+@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
+Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
+
+@cindex @code{ifle} directive
+@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
+Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
+to zero.
+
+@cindex @code{iflt} directive
+@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
+Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
+
+@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
+@item .ifnb @var{text}
+Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
+following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
+
+@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
+@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
+Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
+following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
+
+@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
+@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
+@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
+@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
+Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
+has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
+which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
+
+@cindex @code{ifne} directive
+@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
+Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
+(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
+
+@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
+@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
+Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
+following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
+@end table
+
+@node Incbin
+@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
+
+@cindex @code{incbin} directive
+@cindex binary files, including
+The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
+location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
+option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
+around @var{file}.
+
+The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
+@var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
+read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
+responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
+after the @code{incbin} directive.
+
+@node Include
+@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
+
+@cindex @code{include} directive
+@cindex supporting files, including
+@cindex files, including
+This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
+points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
+if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
+included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
+can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
+(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
+around @var{file}.
+
+@node Int
+@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{int} directive
+@cindex integers, 32-bit
+Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
+For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
+expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
+of target the assembly is for.
+
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset H8
+On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
+integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
+32-bit integers.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Internal
+@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
+
+@cindex @code{internal} directive
+@cindex visibility
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
+@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
+
+This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
+their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
+@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
+(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
+processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Irp
+@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
+
+@cindex @code{irp} directive
+Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
+The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
+terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
+set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
+@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
+@var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
+sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
+
+For example, assembling
+
+@example
+        .irp    param,1,2,3
+        move    d\param,sp@@-
+        .endr
+@end example
+
+is equivalent to assembling
+
+@example
+        move    d1,sp@@-
+        move    d2,sp@@-
+        move    d3,sp@@-
+@end example
+
+For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
+
+@node Irpc
+@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
+
+@cindex @code{irpc} directive
+Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
+The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
+terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
+@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
+assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
+assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
+@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
+
+For example, assembling
+
+@example
+        .irpc    param,123
+        move    d\param,sp@@-
+        .endr
+@end example
+
+is equivalent to assembling
+
+@example
+        move    d1,sp@@-
+        move    d2,sp@@-
+        move    d3,sp@@-
+@end example
+
+For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
+at @xref{Macro}.
+
+@node Lcomm
+@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
+
+@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
+@cindex local common symbols
+@cindex symbols, local common
+Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
+denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
+those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
+section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
+is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
+not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
+argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset HPPA
+The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
+@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Lflags
+@section @code{.lflags}
+
+@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
+@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
+assemblers, but ignores it.
+
+@ifclear no-line-dir
+@node Line
+@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
+
+@cindex @code{line} directive
+@cindex logical line number
+@ifset aout
+Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
+expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
+statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
+reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
+@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
+for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
+@end ifset
+
+Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
+@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
+when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
+were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
+@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
+
+Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
+used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
+debugging.
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Linkonce
+@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
+@cindex COMDAT
+@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
+@cindex common sections
+Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
+This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
+but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
+The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
+Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
+unique.
+
+This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
+writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
+Executable format used on Windows NT.
+
+The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
+following strings.  For example:
+@smallexample
+.linkonce same_size
+@end smallexample
+Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
+
+@table @code
+@item discard
+Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
+
+@item one_only
+Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
+
+@item same_size
+Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
+
+@item same_contents
+Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
+@end table
+
+@node List
+@section @code{.list}
+
+@cindex @code{list} directive
+@cindex listing control, turning on
+Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
+not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
+internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
+counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
+generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
+
+By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
+@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
+the initial value of the listing counter is one.
+
+@node Ln
+@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
+
+@cindex @code{ln} directive
+@ifclear no-line-dir
+@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset no-line-dir
+Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
+must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
+line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
+statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
+line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Loc
+@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
+@cindex @code{loc} directive
+When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
+the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
+number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
+instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
+arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
+the row is added.
+
+The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
+
+@table @code
+@item basic_block
+This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
+@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
+
+@item prologue_end
+This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
+@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
+
+@item epilogue_begin
+This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
+@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
+
+@item is_stmt @var{value}
+This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
+@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
+either 0 or 1.
+
+@item isa @var{value}
+This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
+state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
+
+@item discriminator @var{value}
+This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
+state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
+
+@item view @var{value}
+This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
+current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
+instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
+@code{.debug_line} state machine.  If @var{value} is a label, both the
+@code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
+directives at the same program location.  If @var{value} is the literal
+@code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
+that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
+location.  If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
+the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
+@code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Loc_mark_labels
+@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
+@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
+When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
+the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
+to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
+register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
+The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
+this function respectively.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Local
+@section @code{.local @var{names}}
+
+@cindex @code{local} directive
+This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
+the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
+will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
+they will be created.
+
+For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
+accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
+the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
+(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Long
+@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{long} directive
+@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
+
+@ignore
+@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
+@c what it really ought to do
+@node Lsym
+@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+
+@cindex @code{lsym} directive
+@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
+@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
+the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
+rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
+the same as the expression value:
+@smallexample
+@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
+@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
+@var{value} = @var{expression}
+@end smallexample
+@noindent
+The new symbol is not flagged as external.
+@end ignore
+
+@node Macro
+@section @code{.macro}
+
+@cindex macros
+The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
+generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
+@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
+
+@example
+        .macro  sum from=0, to=5
+        .long   \from
+        .if     \to-\from
+        sum     "(\from+1)",\to
+        .endif
+        .endm
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
+
+@example
+        .long   0
+        .long   1
+        .long   2
+        .long   3
+        .long   4
+        .long   5
+@end example
+
+@ftable @code
+@item .macro @var{macname}
+@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
+@cindex @code{macro} directive
+Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
+definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
+separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
+indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
+@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
+(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
+macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
+cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
+subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
+definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
+
+@table @code
+@item .macro comm
+Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
+arguments.
+
+@item  .macro plus1 p, p1
+@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
+Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
+which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
+@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
+
+@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
+Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
+arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
+After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
+@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
+@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
+,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
+@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
+
+@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
+Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
+arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
+not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
+will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
+
+When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
+position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
+@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
+
+@end table
+
+Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
+as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
+occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
+characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
+(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
+architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
+character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
+replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
+construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
+identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
+this macro definition:
+
+@example
+	.macro label l
+\l:
+	.endm
+@end example
+
+might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
+called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
+assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
+identifier.
+
+Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
+which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
+for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
+length specifier like this:
+
+@example
+	.macro opcode base length
+        \base.\length
+	.endm
+@end example
+
+and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
+instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
+interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
+
+There are several possible ways around this problem:
+
+@table @code
+@item Insert white space
+If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
+solution.  eg:
+
+@example
+	.macro label l
+\l :
+	.endm
+@end example
+
+@item Use @samp{\()}
+The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
+the following text.  eg:
+
+@example
+	.macro opcode base length
+        \base\().\length
+	.endm
+@end example
+
+@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
+In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
+used as a separator.  eg:
+
+@example
+	.altmacro
+	.macro label l
+l&:
+	.endm
+@end example
+@end table
+
+Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
+also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
+and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
+
+@item .endm
+@cindex @code{endm} directive
+Mark the end of a macro definition.
+
+@item .exitm
+@cindex @code{exitm} directive
+Exit early from the current macro definition.
+
+@cindex number of macros executed
+@cindex macros, count executed
+@item \@@
+@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
+executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
+output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
+
+@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
+@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
+macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
+@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
+@end ftable
+
+@node MRI
+@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
+
+@cindex @code{mri} directive
+@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
+If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
+@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
+affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
+of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
+
+@node Noaltmacro
+@section @code{.noaltmacro}
+Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
+
+@node Nolist
+@section @code{.nolist}
+
+@cindex @code{nolist} directive
+@cindex listing control, turning off
+Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
+not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
+internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
+counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
+generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
+
+@node Nops
+@section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
+
+@cindex @code{nops} directive
+@cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
+This directive emits @var{size} bytes filled with no-op instructions.
+@var{size} is absolute expression, which must be a positve value.
+@var{control} controls how no-op instructions should be generated.  If
+the comma and @var{control} are omitted, @var{control} is assumed to be
+zero.
+
+Note: For Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 targets, @var{control} specifies
+the size limit of a no-op instruction.  The valid values of @var{control}
+are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when tuning for
+older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or when
+tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode.  When 0 is used, the no-op
+instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
+
+@node Octa
+@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
+
+@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some?  Or warn?
+@cindex @code{octa} directive
+@cindex integer, 16-byte
+@cindex sixteen byte integer
+This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
+bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
+
+The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
+hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
+
+@node Offset
+@section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
+
+@cindex @code{offset} directive
+Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section.  @var{loc} must
+be an absolute expression.  This directive may be useful for defining
+symbols with absolute values.  Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
+directive.
+
+@node Org
+@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
+
+@cindex @code{org} directive
+@cindex location counter, advancing
+@cindex advancing location counter
+@cindex current address, advancing
+Advance the location counter of the current section to
+@var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
+expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
+you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
+wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
+with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
+@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
+is the same as the current subsection.
+
+@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
+unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
+backwards.
+
+@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
+@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
+@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
+Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
+may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
+a chance to share your improved assembler.
+
+Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
+to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
+people's assemblers.
+
+When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
+intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
+absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
+@var{fill} defaults to zero.
+
+@node P2align
+@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
+
+@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
+@cindex @code{p2align} directive
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
+advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
+counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
+multiple of 8, no change is needed.
+
+The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
+padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
+padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on most systems, if the section is
+marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
+with no-op instructions.
+
+The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
+it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
+directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
+specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
+fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
+required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
+with no-op instructions when appropriate.
+
+@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
+@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
+The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
+@code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
+pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
+fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
+2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
+filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
+the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
+undefined.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node PopSection
+@section @code{.popsection}
+
+@cindex @code{popsection} directive
+@cindex Section Stack
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
+@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
+@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
+(@pxref{Previous}).
+
+This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
+section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
+stack.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Previous
+@section @code{.previous}
+
+@cindex @code{previous} directive
+@cindex Section Stack
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
+@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
+@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
+(@pxref{PopSection}).
+
+This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
+referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
+@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
+subsections).  For example:
+
+@smallexample
+.section A
+ .subsection 1
+  .word 0x1234
+ .subsection 2
+  .word 0x5678
+.previous
+ .word 0x9abc
+@end smallexample
+
+Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
+section A.  Whilst:
+
+@smallexample
+.section A
+.subsection 1
+  # Now in section A subsection 1
+  .word 0x1234
+.section B
+.subsection 0
+  # Now in section B subsection 0
+  .word 0x5678
+.subsection 1
+  # Now in section B subsection 1
+  .word 0x9abc
+.previous
+  # Now in section B subsection 0
+  .word 0xdef0
+@end smallexample
+
+Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
+section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
+
+In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
+the top section on the section stack.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Print
+@section @code{.print @var{string}}
+
+@cindex @code{print} directive
+@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
+assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Protected
+@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
+
+@cindex @code{protected} directive
+@cindex visibility
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
+
+This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
+their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
+@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
+components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
+component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
+this.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Psize
+@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
+
+@cindex @code{psize} directive
+@cindex listing control: paper size
+@cindex paper size, for listings
+Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
+number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
+
+If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
+of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
+default width is 200 columns.
+
+@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
+lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
+@code{.eject}).
+
+If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
+those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
+
+@node Purgem
+@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
+
+@cindex @code{purgem} directive
+Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
+expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node PushSection
+@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
+
+@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
+@cindex Section Stack
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
+@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
+@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
+(@pxref{Previous}).
+
+This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
+top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
+subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
+@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
+as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Quad
+@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
+
+@cindex @code{quad} directive
+@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
+each bignum, it emits
+@ifclear bignum-16
+an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
+warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
+@cindex eight-byte integer
+@cindex integer, 8-byte
+
+The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
+hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
+@end ifclear
+@ifset bignum-16
+a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
+warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
+@cindex sixteen-byte integer
+@cindex integer, 16-byte
+@end ifset
+
+@node Reloc
+@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
+
+@cindex @code{reloc} directive
+Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
+@var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
+the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
+symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
+@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
+absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
+targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
+relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
+section.
+
+@node Rept
+@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
+
+@cindex @code{rept} directive
+Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
+@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
+
+For example, assembling
+
+@example
+        .rept   3
+        .long   0
+        .endr
+@end example
+
+is equivalent to assembling
+
+@example
+        .long   0
+        .long   0
+        .long   0
+@end example
+
+A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated.  Negative counts are not
+allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
+
+@node Sbttl
+@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
+
+@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
+@cindex subtitles for listings
+@cindex listing control: subtitle
+Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
+title line) when generating assembly listings.
+
+This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
+it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node Scl
+@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
+
+@cindex @code{scl} directive
+@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
+@cindex COFF symbol storage class
+Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
+used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
+whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
+symbolic debugging information.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+@node Section
+@section @code{.section @var{name}}
+
+@cindex named section
+Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
+named @var{name}.
+
+This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
+named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
+with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
+
+@ifset COFF
+@ifset ELF
+@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
+@subheading COFF Version
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
+For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
+ways:
+
+@smallexample
+.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
+.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
+@end smallexample
+
+If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
+section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
+
+@table @code
+@item b
+bss section (uninitialized data)
+@item n
+section is not loaded
+@item w
+writable section
+@item d
+data section
+@item e
+exclude section from linking
+@item r
+read-only section
+@item x
+executable section
+@item s
+shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
+@item a
+ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
+@item y
+section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
+@item 0-9
+single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
+@end table
+
+If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
+the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
+loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
+from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
+will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
+
+If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
+taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@ifset COFF
+@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
+@subheading ELF Version
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex Section Stack
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
+@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
+(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
+@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
+
+@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
+For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
+@end smallexample
+
+@anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
+@kindex --sectname-subst
+@cindex section name substitution
+If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
+argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
+at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
+
+@smallexample
+.macro exception_code
+.section %S.exception
+[exception code here]
+.previous
+.endm
+
+.text
+[code]
+exception_code
+[...]
+
+.section .init
+[init code]
+exception_code
+[...]
+@end smallexample
+
+The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
+@code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
+This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
+tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
+need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
+macros just for that purpose.
+
+The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
+combination of the following characters:
+
+@table @code
+@item a
+section is allocatable
+@item d
+section is a GNU_MBIND section
+@item e
+section is excluded from executable and shared library.
+@item w
+section is writable
+@item x
+section is executable
+@item M
+section is mergeable
+@item S
+section contains zero terminated strings
+@item G
+section is a member of a section group
+@item T
+section is used for thread-local-storage
+@item ?
+section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
+@item @code{<number>}
+a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
+field.  Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
+also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
+resulting value.
+@item @code{<target specific>}
+some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
+@end table
+
+Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed.  There are
+a few exceptions to this rule however.  Processor and application specific
+flags can be added to an already defined section.  The @code{.interp},
+@code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
+(@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
+section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
+
+The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
+
+@table @code
+@item @@progbits
+section contains data
+@item @@nobits
+section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
+@item @@note
+section contains data which is used by things other than the program
+@item @@init_array
+section contains an array of pointers to init functions
+@item @@fini_array
+section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
+@item @@preinit_array
+section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
+@item @@@code{<number>}
+a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
+@item @@@code{<target specific>}
+some targets extend this list with their own types
+@end table
+
+Many targets only support the first three section types.  The type may be
+enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
+
+Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
+ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
+@code{%} character.
+
+Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
+special and have fixed types.  Any attempt to declare them with a different
+type will generate an error from the assembler.
+
+If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
+be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
+@end smallexample
+
+Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
+constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
+@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
+@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
+the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
+absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
+which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
+@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
+@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
+
+If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
+be present along with an additional field like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
+@end smallexample
+
+The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
+particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
+
+@table @code
+@item comdat
+indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
+@item .gnu.linkonce
+an alias for comdat
+@end table
+
+Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
+the Merge flag should come first, like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
+@end smallexample
+
+If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
+@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
+present.  Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
+this directive.  If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
+@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
+If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
+
+If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
+the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
+none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
+executable.  The section will contain data.
+
+For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
+directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
+
+@smallexample
+.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
+@end smallexample
+
+Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
+separated flags:
+
+@table @code
+@item #alloc
+section is allocatable
+@item #write
+section is writable
+@item #execinstr
+section is executable
+@item #exclude
+section is excluded from executable and shared library.
+@item #tls
+section is used for thread local storage
+@end table
+
+This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
+contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
+some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
+work.
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+@node Set
+@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
+
+@cindex @code{set} directive
+@cindex symbol value, setting
+Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
+changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
+@var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
+flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
+
+You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
+values given to the symbol are constants.  Values that are based on expressions
+involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
+being done once per assembly.  This is because those targets do not set the
+addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
+final link is performed.  This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
+the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
+different symbols.
+
+If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
+file is the last value stored into it.
+
+@ifset Z80
+On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
+@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Short
+@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{short} directive
+@ifset GENERIC
+@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
+@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
+
+In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
+numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset W16
+@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
+@end ifset
+@ifset W32
+This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
+a 16 bit number for each.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Single
+@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
+
+@cindex @code{single} directive
+@cindex floating point numbers (single)
+This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+has the same effect as @code{.float}.
+@ifset GENERIC
+The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
+@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
+@end ifset
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset IEEEFLOAT
+On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
+numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+@node Size
+@section @code{.size}
+
+This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
+
+@ifset COFF
+@ifset ELF
+@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
+@subheading COFF Version
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
+For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
+@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.size @var{expression}
+@end smallexample
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@ifset COFF
+@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
+@subheading ELF Version
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
+For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
+@end smallexample
+
+This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
+The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
+arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
+symbols.
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+@ifclear no-space-dir
+@node Skip
+@section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
+
+@cindex @code{skip} directive
+@cindex filling memory
+This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
+@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
+@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
+@samp{.space}.
+@end ifclear
+
+@node Sleb128
+@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
+@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
+compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
+symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
+
+@ifclear no-space-dir
+@node Space
+@section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
+
+@cindex @code{space} directive
+@cindex filling memory
+This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
+@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
+and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
+as @samp{.skip}.
+
+@ifset HPPA
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
+targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
+Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
+@code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
+for a summary.
+@end quotation
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset have-stabs
+@node Stab
+@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
+
+@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
+@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
+There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
+All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
+The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
+cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
+Up to five fields are required:
+
+@table @var
+@item string
+This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
+@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
+debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
+using this field.
+
+@item type
+An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
+this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
+and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
+
+@item other
+An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
+low 8 bits of this expression.
+
+@item desc
+An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
+bits of this expression.
+
+@item value
+An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
+@end table
+
+If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
+or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
+you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
+compatible with earlier assemblers!
+
+@table @code
+@cindex @code{stabd} directive
+@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
+
+The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
+It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
+null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
+strings.
+
+The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
+relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
+is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
+assembled.
+
+@cindex @code{stabn} directive
+@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
+The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
+
+@cindex @code{stabs} directive
+@item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
+All five fields are specified.
+@end table
+@end ifset
+@c end     have-stabs
+
+@node String
+@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
+"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
+
+@cindex string, copying to object file
+@cindex string8, copying to object file
+@cindex string16, copying to object file
+@cindex string32, copying to object file
+@cindex string64, copying to object file
+@cindex @code{string} directive
+@cindex @code{string8} directive
+@cindex @code{string16} directive
+@cindex @code{string32} directive
+@cindex @code{string64} directive
+
+Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
+one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
+particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
+You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
+
+The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
+the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
+copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
+are stored in target endianness byte order.
+
+Example:
+@smallexample
+	.string32 "BYE"
+expands to:
+	.string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
+	.string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
+@end smallexample
+
+
+@node Struct
+@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
+
+@cindex @code{struct} directive
+Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
+which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
+@smallexample
+        .struct 0
+field1:
+        .struct field1 + 4
+field2:
+        .struct field2 + 4
+field3:
+@end smallexample
+This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
+@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
+value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
+use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
+before further assembly.
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node SubSection
+@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
+
+@cindex @code{subsection} directive
+@cindex Section Stack
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
+@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
+@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
+(@pxref{Previous}).
+
+This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
+section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
+in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Symver
+@section @code{.symver}
+@cindex @code{symver} directive
+@cindex symbol versioning
+@cindex versions of symbols
+Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
+within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
+typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
+There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
+into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
+shared library.
+
+For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
+@smallexample
+.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
+@end smallexample
+If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
+being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
+alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
+just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
+permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
+of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
+itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
+have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
+file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
+function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
+the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
+building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
+symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
+nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
+
+If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
+references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
+reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
+symbol table.
+
+Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
+@smallexample
+.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
+@end smallexample
+In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
+the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
+difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
+references to @var{name2} by the linker.
+
+The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
+@smallexample
+.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
+@end smallexample
+When @var{name} is not defined within the
+file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
+@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
+name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node Tag
+@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
+
+@cindex COFF structure debugging
+@cindex structure debugging, COFF
+@cindex @code{tag} directive
+This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
+information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
+@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
+definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Text
+@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
+
+@cindex @code{text} directive
+Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
+the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
+expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
+is used.
+
+@node Title
+@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
+
+@cindex @code{title} directive
+@cindex listing control: title line
+Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
+source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
+
+This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
+it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
+
+@ifset COFF-ELF
+@node Type
+@section @code{.type}
+
+This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
+
+@ifset COFF
+@ifset ELF
+@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
+@subheading COFF Version
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex COFF symbol type
+@cindex symbol type, COFF
+@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
+For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
+@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.type @var{int}
+@end smallexample
+
+This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
+entry.
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@ifset COFF
+@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
+@subheading ELF Version
+@end ifset
+
+@cindex ELF symbol type
+@cindex symbol type, ELF
+@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
+For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
+
+@smallexample
+.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
+@end smallexample
+
+This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
+function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
+supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
+compatibility with various other assemblers.
+
+Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
+@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
+below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
+the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
+maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
+assemblers.
+
+The syntaxes supported are:
+
+@smallexample
+  .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
+  .type <name>,#<type>
+  .type <name>,@@<type>
+  .type <name>,%<type>
+  .type <name>,"<type>"
+@end smallexample
+
+The types supported are:
+
+@table @gcctabopt
+@item STT_FUNC
+@itemx function
+Mark the symbol as being a function name.
+
+@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
+@itemx gnu_indirect_function
+Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
+processing.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
+
+@item STT_OBJECT
+@itemx object
+Mark the symbol as being a data object.
+
+@item STT_TLS
+@itemx tls_object
+Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
+
+@item STT_COMMON
+@itemx common
+Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
+
+@item STT_NOTYPE
+@itemx notype
+Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
+
+@item gnu_unique_object
+Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
+will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
+name and type in use.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
+systems).
+
+@end table
+
+Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
+
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+
+@node Uleb128
+@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
+@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
+compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
+symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
+
+@ifset COFF
+@node Val
+@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
+
+@cindex @code{val} directive
+@cindex COFF value attribute
+@cindex value attribute, COFF
+This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
+records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
+entry.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Version
+@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
+
+@cindex @code{version} directive
+This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
+formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node VTableEntry
+@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
+
+@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
+This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
+@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
+
+@node VTableInherit
+@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
+
+@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
+This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
+@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
+parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
+parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
+@end ifset
+
+@node Warning
+@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
+@cindex warning directive
+Similar to the directive @code{.error}
+(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
+
+@node Weak
+@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
+
+@cindex @code{weak} directive
+This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
+@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
+
+On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
+directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
+@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
+
+On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
+When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
+alternate symbol to hold the default value.
+
+@node Weakref
+@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
+
+@cindex @code{weakref} directive
+This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
+be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
+If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
+will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
+symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
+
+The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
+assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
+symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
+resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
+had the references to the alias removed.
+
+The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
+within the assembler.
+
+@node Word
+@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
+
+@cindex @code{word} directive
+This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
+separated by commas.
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@ifset W32
+For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
+@end ifset
+@ifset W16
+For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
+@end ifset
+@end ifclear
+@ifset GENERIC
+
+The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
+depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
+@end ifset
+
+@c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
+@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
+@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+@cindex difference tables altered
+@cindex altered difference tables
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
+@end quotation
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
+addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
+interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
+@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
+
+@end ifset
+In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
+@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
+Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
+compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
+directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
+@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
+creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
+This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
+first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
+of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
+table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
+contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
+@code{sym2}.
+
+If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
+secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
+@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
+long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
+and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
+minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
+entries in the original jump table as necessary.
+
+@ifset INTERNALS
+@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
+@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
+assembly language programmers.
+@end ifset
+@end ifset
+@c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+
+@ifclear no-space-dir
+@node Zero
+@section @code{.zero @var{size}}
+
+@cindex @code{zero} directive
+@cindex filling memory with zero bytes
+This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes.  @var{size} must be an absolute
+expression.  This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
+so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
+instead of zero.  Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
+@end ifclear
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node 2byte
+@section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
+@cindex @code{2byte} directive
+@cindex two-byte integer
+@cindex integer, 2-byte
+
+This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.  If there
+are no expressions then the directive does nothing.  Otherwise each expression
+is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
+section, using the endian model of the target.  If an expression will not fit
+in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
+bytes of the expression's value are used.  If an expression cannot be evaluated
+at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
+value at link time.  
+
+This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
+values.  As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
+different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
+
+This directive is only available for ELF targets,
+
+@node 4byte
+@section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
+@cindex @code{4byte} directive
+@cindex four-byte integer
+@cindex integer, 4-byte
+
+Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
+long values into the output.
+
+@node 8byte
+@section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
+@cindex @code{8byte} directive
+@cindex eight-byte integer
+@cindex integer, 8-byte
+
+Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
+byte long bignum values into the output.
+
+@end ifset
+
+@node Deprecated
+@section Deprecated Directives
+
+@cindex deprecated directives
+@cindex obsolescent directives
+One day these directives won't work.
+They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
+@table @t
+@item .abort
+@item .line
+@end table
+
+@ifset ELF
+@node Object Attributes
+@chapter Object Attributes
+@cindex object attributes
+
+@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
+into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
+Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
+point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
+requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
+passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
+hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
+generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
+newer generation at run-time.
+
+This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
+@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
+time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
+correctly.
+
+Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
+attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
+string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
+and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
+or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
+attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
+
+Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
+The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
+
+@menu
+* GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
+* Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
+@end menu
+
+@node GNU Object Attributes
+@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
+
+The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
+with vendor @samp{gnu}.
+
+Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
+its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
+an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
+2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
+architecture-dependent ones.
+
+@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
+
+These attributes are valid on all architectures.
+
+@table @r
+@item Tag_compatibility (32)
+The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
+the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
+then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
+than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
+arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
+@end table
+
+@subsection MIPS Attributes
+
+@table @r
+@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
+The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
+@item
+1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
+double-precision FPU.
+@item
+2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
+@item
+3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
+@item
+4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
+floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
+number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
+@item
+5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
+with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
+general-purpose registers.
+@item
+6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
+registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
+@item
+7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
+registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
+direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
+@end itemize
+@end table
+
+@subsection PowerPC Attributes
+
+@table @r
+@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
+The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
+@item
+1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
+@item
+2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
+@item
+3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
+@end itemize
+
+@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
+The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
+@item
+1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
+@item
+2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
+@item
+3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
+@end itemize
+@end table
+
+@subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
+
+@table @r
+@item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
+The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
+@item
+1 for files using software vector ABI.
+@item
+2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
+@end itemize
+@end table
+
+@node Defining New Object Attributes
+@section Defining New Object Attributes
+
+If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
+will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
+mailing list.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
+@item
+The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
+@item
+The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
+and issue any appropriate link warnings.
+@item
+Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
+@item
+@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
+@item
+GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
+@end itemize
+
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+@node Machine Dependencies
+@chapter Machine Dependent Features
+
+@cindex machine dependencies
+The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
+each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
+vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
+directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
+assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
+@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
+optimization.
+
+This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
+include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
+subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
+
+@menu
+@ifset AARCH64
+* AArch64-Dependent::		AArch64 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset ALPHA
+* Alpha-Dependent::		Alpha Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset ARC
+* ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset ARM
+* ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset AVR
+* AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset Blackfin
+* Blackfin-Dependent::		Blackfin Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset CR16
+* CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset CRIS
+* CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset D10V
+* D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset D30V
+* D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset EPIPHANY
+* Epiphany-Dependent::          EPIPHANY Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset H8/300
+* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset HPPA
+* HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset I80386
+* i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset IA64
+* IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset IP2K
+* IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset LM32
+* LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset M32C
+* M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset M32R
+* M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset M680X0
+* M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset M68HC11
+* M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset S12Z
+* S12Z-Dependent::            S12Z Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset METAG
+* Meta-Dependent ::             Meta Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset MICROBLAZE
+* MicroBlaze-Dependent::	MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset MIPS
+* MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset MMIX
+* MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset MSP430
+* MSP430-Dependent::		MSP430 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset NDS32
+* NDS32-Dependent::             Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset NIOSII
+* NiosII-Dependent::            Altera Nios II Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset NS32K
+* NS32K-Dependent::		NS32K Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset PDP11
+* PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset PJ
+* PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset PPC
+* PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset PRU
+* PRU-Dependent::               PRU Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset RISCV
+* RISC-V-Dependent::            RISC-V Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset RL78
+* RL78-Dependent::              RL78 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset RX
+* RX-Dependent::                RX Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset S390
+* S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset SCORE
+* SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset SH
+* SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset SPARC
+* Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset TIC54X
+* TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset TIC6X
+* TIC6X-Dependent ::            TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset TILEGX
+* TILE-Gx-Dependent ::          Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset TILEPRO
+* TILEPro-Dependent ::          Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset V850
+* V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset VAX
+* Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset VISIUM
+* Visium-Dependent::            Visium Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset WASM32
+* WebAssembly-Dependent::       WebAssembly Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset XGATE
+* XGATE-Dependent::             XGATE Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset XSTORMY16
+* XSTORMY16-Dependent::         XStormy16 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset XTENSA
+* Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset Z80
+* Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@ifset Z8000
+* Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
+@end ifset
+@end menu
+
+@lowersections
+@end ifset
+
+@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
+@c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
+@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
+@c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
+@c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
+@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
+@c in both conditional blocks.
+
+@ifset AARCH64
+@include c-aarch64.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ALPHA
+@include c-alpha.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ARC
+@include c-arc.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset ARM
+@include c-arm.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset AVR
+@include c-avr.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset Blackfin
+@include c-bfin.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset CR16
+@include c-cr16.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset CRIS
+@include c-cris.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset Renesas-all
+@ifclear GENERIC
+@node Machine Dependencies
+@chapter Machine Dependent Features
+
+The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
+and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
+chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
+family.
+
+@menu
+* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
+* SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
+@end menu
+@lowersections
+@end ifclear
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset D10V
+@include c-d10v.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset D30V
+@include c-d30v.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset EPIPHANY
+@include c-epiphany.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset H8/300
+@include c-h8300.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset HPPA
+@include c-hppa.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset I80386
+@include c-i386.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset IA64
+@include c-ia64.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset IP2K
+@include c-ip2k.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset LM32
+@include c-lm32.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M32C
+@include c-m32c.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M32R
+@include c-m32r.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M680X0
+@include c-m68k.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset M68HC11
+@include c-m68hc11.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset S12Z
+@include c-s12z.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset METAG
+@include c-metag.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MICROBLAZE
+@include c-microblaze.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MIPS
+@include c-mips.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MMIX
+@include c-mmix.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset MSP430
+@include c-msp430.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset NDS32
+@include c-nds32.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset NIOSII
+@include c-nios2.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset NS32K
+@include c-ns32k.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset PDP11
+@include c-pdp11.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset PJ
+@include c-pj.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset PPC
+@include c-ppc.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset PRU
+@include c-pru.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset RISCV
+@include c-riscv.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset RL78
+@include c-rl78.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset RX
+@include c-rx.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset S390
+@include c-s390.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset SCORE
+@include c-score.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset SH
+@include c-sh.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset SPARC
+@include c-sparc.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset TIC54X
+@include c-tic54x.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset TIC6X
+@include c-tic6x.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset TILEGX
+@include c-tilegx.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset TILEPRO
+@include c-tilepro.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset V850
+@include c-v850.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset VAX
+@include c-vax.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset VISIUM
+@include c-visium.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset WASM32
+@include c-wasm32.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset XGATE
+@include c-xgate.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset XSTORMY16
+@include c-xstormy16.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset XTENSA
+@include c-xtensa.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset Z80
+@include c-z80.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset Z8000
+@include c-z8k.texi
+@end ifset
+
+@ifset GENERIC
+@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
+@raisesections
+@end ifset
+
+@node Reporting Bugs
+@chapter Reporting Bugs
+@cindex bugs in assembler
+@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
+
+Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
+
+Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
+not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
+entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
+Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
+
+In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
+information that enables us to fix the bug.
+
+@menu
+* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
+* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
+@end menu
+
+@node Bug Criteria
+@section Have You Found a Bug?
+@cindex bug criteria
+
+If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@cindex fatal signal
+@cindex assembler crash
+@cindex crash of assembler
+@item
+If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
+@command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
+
+@cindex error on valid input
+@item
+If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
+
+@cindex invalid input
+@item
+If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
+is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
+be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
+
+@item
+If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
+of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
+@end itemize
+
+@node Bug Reporting
+@section How to Report Bugs
+@cindex bug reports
+@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
+
+A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
+you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
+contact that organization first.
+
+You can find contact information for many support companies and
+individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
+distribution.
+
+@ifset BUGURL
+In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
+to @value{BUGURL}.
+@end ifset
+
+The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
+@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
+fact or leave it out, state it!
+
+Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
+and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
+name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
+not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
+happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
+perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
+the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
+give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
+and the most helpful.
+
+Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
+it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
+that the bug has not been reported previously.
+
+Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
+bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
+respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
+You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
+
+To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
+it with the @samp{--version} argument.
+
+Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
+the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
+
+@item
+Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
+
+@item
+The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
+version number.
+
+@item
+What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
+``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
+
+@item
+The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
+observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
+all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
+
+If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
+and then we might not encounter the bug.
+
+@item
+A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
+the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
+high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
+when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
+the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
+file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
+@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
+
+@item
+A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
+incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
+
+Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
+will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
+notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
+make a mistake.
+
+Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
+explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
+@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
+library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
+would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
+would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
+expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
+observations.
+
+@item
+If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
+diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
+option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
+discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
+by line number.
+
+The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
+sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
+@end itemize
+
+Here are some things that are not necessary:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+A description of the envelope of the bug.
+
+Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
+which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
+changes will not affect it.
+
+This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
+will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
+with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
+We recommend that you save your time for something else.
+
+Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
+of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
+output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
+less time, and so on.
+
+However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
+report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
+
+@item
+A patch for the bug.
+
+A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
+the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
+a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
+to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
+
+Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
+construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
+the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
+one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
+
+And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
+patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
+help us to understand.
+
+@item
+A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
+
+Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
+things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
+@end itemize
+
+@node Acknowledgements
+@chapter Acknowledgements
+
+If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
+it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
+maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
+@c (October 2012),
+the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
+
+Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
+more details?}
+
+Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
+information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
+extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
+
+K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
+many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
+up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
+testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
+including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
+and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
+support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
+port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
+file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
+assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
+
+Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
+in format-specific I/O modules.
+
+The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
+has done much work with it since.
+
+The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
+
+Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
+
+The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
+University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+
+Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
+(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
+(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
+support a.out format.
+
+Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
+tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
+Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
+use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
+targets.
+
+John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
+simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
+updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
+fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
+remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
+cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
+required the proverbial one-bit fix.
+
+Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
+68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
+added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
+PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
+
+Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
+
+Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
+
+Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
+along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
+formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
+the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
+
+Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
+Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
+Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
+Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
+and some initial 64-bit support).
+
+Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
+
+Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
+support for openVMS/Alpha.
+
+Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
+flavors.
+
+David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
+Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
+
+Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
+configuration enhancements.
+
+Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
+
+Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
+you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
+want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
+intentionally leaving anyone out.
+
+@node GNU Free Documentation License
+@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
+@include fdl.texi
+
+@node AS Index
+@unnumbered AS Index
+
+@printindex cp
+
+@bye
+@c Local Variables:
+@c fill-column: 79
+@c End: